Home

Braun 6510 Electric Shaver User Manual

1. Operation Tires and wheels Warning A N The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in a reliable manner if you have set the correct tire inflation pressures for each tire If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set the system will monitor the pressure according to the incorrect value gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 The standard display menu appears in the multifunction display gt page 130 Press button BVA or FA repeatedly until the following message appears in the multifunction display Run Flat Indicator active Reactivation possible Press button ES The following message will appear in the multifunction display Tire pres OK now If you wish to confirm activation gt Press button ES The following message will appear in the multifunction display Run Flat Indicator Reactivated After a certain learning phase the Run Flat Indicator checks the set pressure values for all four tires If you wish to cancel activation gt Press button Sj or gt Wait until the message Tire pres OK now disappears Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires Underinflated tires Underinflated tires can e cause excessive and uneven tire wear e adversely affect fuel economy e lead to tire failure from being overheated e adversely affect handling characteristics Warning A N Follow recommended tire inflation pres sures Do
2. gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 gt Press button or on the mul tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display appears in the multifunction display gt page 125 gt Press button BV or EAN until the maintenance service indicator display with the service symbol or and the service deadline appears in the multifunction display Operation Maintenance If the battery is disconnected the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the maintenance service indicator To arrive at the true maintenance service deadline you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the maintenance service indicator message or maintenance ser vice indicator display Do not confuse the maintenance service indicator with the engine oil level indicator EA Resetting the maintenance service indicator In the event that the maintenance service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center you can have the maintenance service indicator reset The automotive maintenance facility carrying out the maintenance service will find the information for resetting the maintenance service indicator in the maintenance relevant information for your vehicle Such information is available from either your authorized Mercedes Benz Center or directly from Mercedes Benz If the maintenance service indicator was inadvertently reset have an auth
3. Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible Warning A N For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Adjust head restraint so that the head re straint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an ac cident or similar situation Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident Controls in detail Seats Folding head restraints back with release button The rear seat head restraints can be folded backward for increased visibility i a SN P91 16 2248 1 Release button gt Push release button Q The head restraint will fold backward You can also fold the rear outer seat head restraints back using the switch in the center console gt page 108 Controls in detail Seats Folding head restraints back with Placing head restraints upright Head restraint tilt rear outer seats switch in the center console Two different head restraint angle positions are available gt Press the release button gt page 107 and tilt the head restraint to the desired position Removing and installing rear seat head restraints rear outer seats Adjust the head restraint in such a way b s 7 Pn TN P 91 1 he T y ao T ee fa oe e 1
4. Operation Tires and wheels Direction of rotation Unidirectional tires offer added advan tages such as better hydroplaning perfor mance To benefit however you must make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of rotation spinning of the tire Spare wheels may be mounted against the direction of rotation spinning even with a unidirectional tire for temporary use only until the regular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced Always observe and follow applicable tempo rary use restrictions and speed limita tions indicated on the spare wheel Loading the vehicle Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry e The Tire and Loading Information placard Example A or the Vehicle Tire Information placard Example B can be found on the driver s door B pillar This placard tells you important information about the number of people that can be in the vehicle and the total weight that can be carried in the vehicle It also contains information on the proper size and recommended tire inflation pressures for the original equipment tires on your vehicle The Certification label also found on the driver s door B pillar tells you about the gross weight capacity of your vehi cle called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo The
5. 107 9 MHz 930 1710 KHz Controls in detail Audio system Calling up wavebands for radios without SAT gt Press FM or AM soft key to switch between FM and AM The FM and AM wavebands are called up one after another or gt Press WB soft key The weather band menu is called up The waveband currently selected appears in the upper left hand corner of the display Controls in detail Audio system Calling up wavebands for radios Selecting a station Direct frequency input with SAT The following options are available for gt Select desired waveband gt Press FM AM or WB soft key repeatedly selecting a station until desired waveband has been e Direct frequency input gt page 206 selected e Manual tuning gt page 207 The FM AM and WB wavebands are called up one after another e Automatic seek tuning gt page 207 The waveband currently selected e Scan search gt page 207 appears in the upper left hand corner e Station memory gt page 207 i of the display gt Press button e Automatic station memory Autostore gt page 208 Enter desired frequency with buttons EE to Rg The station search proceeds in the 7 following frequency increments a e 200 KHz in FM range You can only enter frequencies within the respective waveband e 10 KHz in AM range l o If a button is not pressed within 4 seconds the radio will return to the last station tuned Controls
6. 2 Parking brake pedal T gt Release parking brake by pulling on If you hear a warning signal and the handle 1 message Release parking brake ap The warning lamp USA only pears in the multifunction display when or Canada only in the driving off you have forgotten to re instrument cluster goes out a a raKet Simultaneously depressing the acceler ator pedal and applying the brake re duces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear Getting started Once the vehicle is in motion the auto matic central locking system engages and the locking knobs drop down For more information see Automatic central locking gt page 103 Do not run cold engine at high engine speeds Running a cold engine at high engine speeds may shorten the service life of the engine Getting started Driving Automatic transmission Wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion Depress the brake pedal Move gear selector lever to position D to drive forward or to position R to drive rearward Place the gear selector lever in position P or R only when the vehicle is stopped in order to avoid damaging the transmission Release the brake pedal Carefully depress the accelerator pedal Warning A N It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le ver out of P or N if the engine speed is high er than idle speed If your foot is not firml
7. Panic button gt page 81 Canada only Only vehicles equipped with an anti theft alarm system have SmartKeys with integrated panic button Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside which could result in an accident and or serious injury To prevent possible malfunction avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation a USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the us
8. 436 Capacities nce cissiniesiercondausesneucdnwenecsess 436 Engine OMS sxscaneroesasppnensancaanassecenanss 437 Engine oil additives 060 437 Air conditioning refrigerant 437 Brake fluid ccccccssssecceeeeeeeees 437 Premium unleaded gasoline 438 Gasoline additives 0cccceee 438 Fuel requirements cccccceeeees 439 COONS ener tee ener ene ne rer 439 Windshield washer and headlamp Cleaning system eceseeecee eens 442 Y Product information Please observe the following in your own best interest We recommend using Genuine Mercedes Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model We have tested these parts to determine their reliability safety and special Suitability for Mercedes Benz vehicles We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them even if in indi vidual cases an official approval or authori zation by governmental or other agencies should exist Use of such parts and acces sories could adversely affect the safety performance or reliability of your vehicle Please do not use them Introduction Product information Genuine Mercedes Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive informa tion also on permi
9. Step firmly on parking brake pedal When the engine Is running the brake warning lamp USA only or Canada only in the instrument cluster comes on Warning AN When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could release the parking brake and or move the gear selector lever from position P either of which could result in an accident and or serious injury Warning AN Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se lector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous Also when parked on an incline position P alone may not prevent your vehi cle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P When parked on an incline turn front wheel towards the road curb Getting started Parking and locking Switching off headlamps gt Turn exterior lamp switch to BR gt page 48 For more information see Lighting gt page 114 Getting started Parking and locking Turning off engine gt Place the gear selector lever in position P Always set the parking brake in addi tion to shifting to position P On slopes turn the front wheels towards the road curb gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position O gt Remove th
10. Upholstery Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that have the tendency to give off coloring e g when wet etc may cause the upholstery to become permanently dis colored By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover contact discoloration will be prevented Leather upholstery gt Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care Exercise particular care when cleaning per forated leather as its underside should not become wet Operation Vehicle care MB Tex upholstery gt Use Mercedes Benz approved Interior Care onto a soft lint free cloth and ap ply with light pressure for cleaning the upholstery Wood trims gt Dampen cloth using water and use damp cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle Do not use solvents like tar remover or wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these may be abrasive Practical hints What to do if Where will I find Unlocking locking in an emergency Opening closing in an emergency Resetting activated head restraints Replacing SmartKey batteries Replacing bulbs Replacing wiper blades Flat tire Battery Jump starting Towing the vehicle Fuses Practical hints What to do if Lamps in instrument cluster Problem The yellow ABS indicator lamp comes on while driving General information If any of the following lamps in the instru
11. activated automatically press hazard warning flasher switch 1 once to switch it off With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch The hazard warning flasher switch is set for either left or right turn only the located on the upper part of the center console respective turn signals will operate when the SmartKey is in the starter switch position 1 or 2 lt lt 1 Hazard warning flasher switch Controls in detail Lighting Interior lighting Deactivating automatic control gt Press the fam symbol on rocker switch 3 The interior lighting remains switched off in darkness even when you y ZZ T e open a door 4 aN The controls are located in the overhead control panel unlock the vehicle E amp O e remove the SmartKey from the lt starter switch PB2 20 2574 31 1 Rear interior lights on off 2 Right front reading lamp on off 3 Rocker switch for automatic control system 4 Left front reading lamp on off Leaving an interior light switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the engine turned off could result in a discharged battery Activating automatic control gt Press rocker switch to center position The interior lighting switches on in darkness when you e unlock the vehicle e open a door e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch The interior lighting switches off after a preset t
12. gt Press button Switching off gt or gt Remove SmartKey from starter switch Press Should excessively high temperatures occur while the audio system is being operated the display will dim If tem peratures continue to rise HIGH TEMP will appear in the display after which the audio system will be switched off for a cooling down period button Adjusting the volume gt Turn rotary control of button The volume will increase or decrease depending on the direction turned If your vehicle equipment includes a Mercedes Benz specified mobile telephone you can adjust its volume separately from the volume of the audio system while the telephone is being used Adjusting sound functions The bass and treble functions are called up by pressing the button Settings for bass and treble are stored separately for the AM and FM wavebands weather band CD mode and telephone mode Bass gt Press button repeatedly until BASS appears in the display Controls in detail Audio system or P82 60 4450 31 Press or soft key to increase or decrease tone level accordingly Press RES soft key briefly to reset bass tones to their center level The radio switches back to the standard radio menu 8 seconds after the last soft key is pressed Controls in detail Audio system Adjusting treble gt Press button repeatedly until TREBLE appears in the displ
13. 212 mi P54 32 3192 31 Controls in detail Control system TEL menu e lf the telephone is off the message Warning AN A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call If you choose to use the telephone while driving please use the hands free device and only use the telephone when weather road and traffic conditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is e lf the telephone is on running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system possibly resulting in an accident and personal injury PHONE OFF appears in the multifunction display The telephone will then search for a network During this time the multi function display is empty As soon as the telephone has found a network the message READY appears In the multifunction display You can use the functions in the TEL menu to operate your telephone p
14. The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only ag in 1 6 mm of tread remains Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire Vehicle capacity weight Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilograms 150 Ibs times the vehicle s designated seating capacity Vehicle maximum load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing it by two Rotating tires A Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires are of the same dimension Warning If your vehicle is equipped with mixed size tires different tire dimensions front vs rear tire rotation is not possible Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all around If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the same dimension all around tires can be rotated observing a a front to rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation spinning direction of the tire gt page 308 In some cases such as when your vehicle is equipped with mixed siz
15. Therefore the brake fluid must be replaced regularly Refer to your vehicle s Mainte nance Booklet for replacement interval Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes Benz is recommended An authorized Mercedes Benz Center will provide you with additional information Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Premium unleaded gasoline Warning AN Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous It burns violently and can cause serious injury Whenever you are around gasoline avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact extin guish all smoking materials Never allow sparks flame or smoking materials near gasoline To maintain the engine s durability and performance premium unleaded gaso line must be used If premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used follow these precautions e Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon as possible e Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration e Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two persons and no luggage e Do not exceed Be of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain Gasoline additives A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build up caused by gasoline Mercedes Benz recommends only the use of quality gasoline containing additives that pr
16. To avoid damage to the windshield Kaaa a a Cas iuce Do not pull the release lever while the wipers or hood never open the hood if struts vehicle is in motion Otherwise the hood ea folded forward away could be forced open by passing air flow ronie nnde Warning Opening To help prevent personal injury stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running Make sure the hood is properly closed before driving When closing the hood use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers The hood lock release lever is located to the left of the steering wheel under the dashboard The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off Stay clear of fan blades I me 2 1 Hood lock release lever Operation Engine compartment Warning A N If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment or if the coolant tem perature gauge indicates that the engine is overheated do not open the hood Move away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled If necessary call the fire department Warning A N The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components ignition coils spark plug sockets diagnos tic socket of the ignition system e with the engine running e while starting the engine e if ignition is
17. down into gt Push button Q to disengage ashtray Warning AN the retainer until it engages insert 2 and remove it gt Push down cover plate to close Remove front ashtray only with vehicle Reinstalling ashtray insert ashtray standing still Set the parking brake to gt Push the ashtray insert 2 down into secure vehicle from movement Move gear The cover plate engages y 2 E the retainer until it engages selector lever to position N With gear selec tor lever in position N turn off the engine Rear seat ashtray gt Push at top of cover 8 to close Ss WW eer ashtray gt Secure vehicle from movement by setting the parking brake gt Move the gear selector lever to position N Now you have more room to take out the ashtray insert gt Push sliding button 2 to the right 125 31 The ashtray insert slides out C Button slightly 2 Ashtray insert gt Remove the ashtray insert Cover gt Pull at top of cover Controls in detail Useful features Cigarette lighter The lighter socket can be used to ac commodate 12V DC electrical acces sories up to a maximum of 85 W designed for use with the standard cigarette lighter plug type Keep in mind however that connecting acces sories to the lighter socket for exam ple extensive connecting and disconnecting or using plugs that do not fit properly can damage the lighter Warning A N Never touch the he
18. gt page 426 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The total weight of the vehicle all occupants all cargo and the trailer tongue load gt page 314 must never exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The to tal allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear To assure that your vehicle does not ex ceed the maximum permissible weight limits GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle have the loaded vehicle including driver passengers and all cargo and if ap plicable trailer fully loaded weighed on a suitable commercial scale Trailer tongue load The tongue load of any trailer is an impor tant weight to measure because it affects the load you can carry in your vehicle If a trailer is towed the tongue load must be added to the weight of all occupants riding and any cargo you are carrying in the vehicle The tongue load typically is ten percent of the trailer weight and every thing loaded in it Your Mercedes Benz has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their cargo Mercedes Benz does not recom mend trailer towing with your vehicle Recommended tire inflation pressure A Warning Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being over heated Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires
19. Call up maintenance service 338 display Check engine oil level 299 55 Mph P54 32 2347 31 1 Trip odometer 2 Main odometer P54 32 2734 31 If another display is shown instead of the Digital speedometer standard display I gt Press button or repeatedly Select either the display of the digital until you see the standard display speedometer or the outside tempera gt Press button BV or FA to select Rene Canon apeeer horas the functions in the standard display menu AUDIO menu The functions in the Audio menu operate the audio equipment which you currently have turned on If no audio equipment is currently turned on the message Audio off appears in the multifunction display The following functions are available Function Page Select radio station eh Select satellite radio station 132 USA only Operate CD player 132 Select radio station gt Turn on the radio gt page 200 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate operating instructions Press button or repeatedly until the currently tuned station appears in the multifunction display 1 Fit lt gt 101 1 FM S7 P54 32 318 1 731 Controls in detail Control system gt Press button BVA or EAN repeatedly until the desired station is found You can only store new stations using the corresponding feature on the radio gt page 208 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate operating instruct
20. Canada only Visit workshop reservoir notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not add brake fluid This will not solve the problem ne A Warning If you find that the brake fluid in the Brake pad thickness must be visually gt brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the inspected by a qualified technician at Driving with the message Brake fluid es ReO Tenn eG erent ae minimum mark or below have the the intervals specified in the Mainte aie brake system checked for brake pad nance Booklet an accident Have your brake system checked immediately Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can re sult in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You can be seriously burned thickness and leaks Display symbol Display message Coolant Check level Warning A N Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts You can be seriously burned Practical hints What to do if Possible cause consequence Possible solution The coolant level is too low gt Add coolant gt page 301 gt If you have to add coolant frequently have the cooling system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine d
21. appear Clearing a message will not cor rect the condition that caused the message to appear Warning A N All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and where a malfunction is indicated addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or result in property damage or personal injury Warning A N No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative As a result you will not be able to see infor mation about your driving conditions such as speed or outside temperature warning indicator lamps malfunction warning mes sages or the failure of any systems Driving characteristics may be impaired If you must continue to drive please do so with added caution Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Switching on the ignition causes all instrument cluster lamps except low beam headlamp indicator lamp high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated as well as the multifunction display to come on Make sure the lamps and multifunction display are in working order before starting your journey Practical hints What to do if On the pages that follow you will find a compilation of the most important warning and malfunction messa
22. dent systems they are closely inter faced to provide effective occupant protection Tele Aid System Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response automatic and manual emergency roadside assis tance and information Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call The Tele Aid system is operational provided that the vehicle s battery Is charged properly connected not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available Telematics A combination of the terms tele communications and informatics Tightening torque Force times lever arm e g a lug wrench with which threaded fasteners such as wheel bolts are tightened TIN Tire Identification Number gt page 333 Tire load rating gt page 334 Tire ply composition and material used gt page 334 VIN Vehicle Identification Number The number set by the manufacturer Tire speed rating gt page 334 Tracti eae 334 and placed on the body to uniquely identify each vehicle produced Tread gt page 334 Treadwear indicators gt page 334 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards gt page 334 Vehicle capacity weight gt page 334 Vehicle maximum load on the tire gt page 334 A ABS 25 82 443 Indicator lamp 350 Messages in display 360 Accelerator position automatic transmission 158 Accessory weight 331 Ac
23. gt Lift the rear of cover Q gt Slide out retainer 3 and remove cover 1 by pulling towards front Opening fuse box Be Syl 4 Fuse box cover Clamps gt With a dry cloth remove any moisture from the fuse box gt Release clamps gt Remove fuse box cover 4 Practical hints Fuses Closing fuse box gt Make sure that the sealing rubber is properly positioned gt Press fuse box cover 4 down and secure with clamps Installing cover gt Insert cover Q sideways into retainer G gt Twist screws 2 90 clockwise Fuse box in trunk Opening fuse box The fuse box is located in the trunk behind H D the left hand trim panel gt Remove fuse box cover 3 Closing fuse box gt Insert fuse box cover gt Insert trim panel C Trim panel 2 Fuse extractor 3 Fuse box cover Technical data Parts service Warranty coverage Identification labels Layout of poly V belt drive Engine Rims and Tires Electrical system Main dimensions and weights Fuels coolants lubricants etc Technical data Parts service The Technical data section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle All authorized Mercedes Benz Centers maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes Benz parts required for mainte nance and repair work In addition strate gically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts s
24. telephone Telephone mode selector Speed dialing memory telephone in ascending order Terminating a call telephone CD slot CD ejection Page 227 223 224 228 218 Controls in detail Audio system Item Soft keys Volume Switching on off Manual tuning seek tuning radio Track search reverse CD Manual tuning seek tuning radio Track search fast forward CD Page 200 201 200 207 221 207 221 Controls in detail Audio system Button and soft key operation Operation a gt l If the radio is switched on without the In these instructions the alphanumeric Switch h f SmartKey ia the starter switch iewi keypad right side of radio panel and the ULEI NE TOENI ON 0 i ah automatically switch off again after function buttons left side of radio panel Swiichi ooro DOi Nes are referred to as buttons The four keys ene ON Beene l below the display panel are referred toas Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch If your vehicle is equipped with a soft keys to position 1 or 2 telephone the display may prompt you Ifth di t to enter your PIN GSM network or T PA EE a code TDMA or CDMA network removed the SmartKey from the starter switch the audio system will automatically come back on as you turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 Do not press directly in the display face Otherwise the display will be damaged or
25. up lock to position Q Audio system COMAND with CD changer The CD changer is located in the glove box Armrest storage compartments Opening upper compartment gt Press button on driver s side or button 2 on passenger side and lift armrest Closing upper compartment gt Press armrest down until it engages into place The Roadside Assistance button and the Information button are located in the armrest storage com partment if equipped 1 Handle 2 Button passenger side 3 Button driver s side Opening storage compartment gt Pull handle and lift armrest Closing storage compartment gt Press armrest down until it engages into place Controls in detail Useful features Armrest in the rear passenger compartment gt Pull the top of the armrest out and fold it down Do not sit on or lean your body weight against the armrest when it is folded down as you could otherwise damage it Controls in detail Useful features Parcel net in front passenger footwell A small convenience parcel net is located in the front passenger footwell It is for small and light items such as road maps mail etc Warning A N The parcel net is intended for storing light weight items only Heavy objects objects with sharp edges or fragile objects may not be transported in the parcel net In an accident during hard brak ing or sudden maneuvers they
26. Center as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Belt system Drive to workshop Steering oi Visit workshop Warning A N If the level of steering gear oil in reservoir is too low the steering power assistance could fail Much greater effort will then be needed to turn the steering wheel Do not add steering oil without checking the steering system Do not drive the vehicle Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Possible cause consequence The seat belt system is malfunctioning The steering gear oil level is too low There is a danger of steering gear damage Possible solution gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Have the system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Display symbol A Display message Close slid pop up sunroot Close slid pop up sunroot Tele Aid malfunction Drive to workshop Function unavailable Trunk open Washer fluid please refill Practical hints What to do if Possible cause consequence Possible solution You have opened the driver s door with gt the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the sliding portion of the tilt sliding sunroof open You have opened the driver s door with gt the SmartKey removed fr
27. Mada Fe N o SASSA e Pullthe head restraint forward until it 1 Switch for rear seat head restraints locks into position TES i that it is as close to the head as gt Start the engine gt page 45 possible i l gt Press switch Q Saming The rear seat head restraints will fold Make sure the head restraints engage when backward placing them upright Otherwise their The rear center seat head restraint protective function cannot be assured cannot be removed A For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Warning Adjust head restraint so that the head re straint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an ac cident or similar situation Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intend ed to help reduce injuries during an acci dent Do not interchange head restraints from front and rear seat P91 16 2241 31 1 Release button Removing rear seat head restraints gt Fold back head restraint gt page 107 gt Pull head restraint to its highest position gt Push release button and pull out head restraint Installing rear seat head restraints gt Insert head restraint and push it down until it engages gt Push button Q and adjust head restraint to desired position Controls in detail Seats Lumbar
28. Open trunk lid Press button Q The flap 3 opens downward Press button Q firmly until ski sack frame 2 is released Pull ski sack frame 2 with ski sack out Controls in detail Loading A Split rear bench seat Folding the backrest forward Warning The release handle is located in the trunk To expand the cargo area you can fold Never drive vehicle with trunk open while down the left and right rear seat backrests the ski sack is removed Deadly carbon monoxide CO gases may enter vehicle in terior resulting in unconsciousness and death The two sections can be folded down separately Warning 0 l When expanding the luggage area always To prevent unauthorized persons from fold the seat cushions fully forward accessing the trunk always close the flap Unless you are transporting cargo the oE JNU raman properly locked in gt Pull release handle the upright position Installing the ski sack gt Fully retract and fold rearward head In an accident during hard braking or Aianei 108 Install the ski sack in the reverse order E aE IGocentererilbe ints gt page 108 gt Push ski sack frame with ski sack thrown around inside the vehicle and cause inward until the ski sack frame snaps injury to vehicle occupants unless the items into place are securely fastened in the vehicle gt Close flap Always use the cargo tie down rings gt page 255 Close trunk
29. Opening button for trunk 3 Unlock button 4 Panic button gt page 81 Canada only Only vehicles equipped with an anti theft alarm system have SmartKeys with integrated panic button Starter switch positions Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury SmartKey Starter switch 0 For removing SmartKey The steering is locked when the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch 1 Power supply for some electrical consumers such as seat adjustment Getting started Unlocking 2 Ignition power supply for all electrical consumers and driving position All lamps except low beam headlamp indicator lamp high beam headlamp in dicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated in the instru ment cluster come on If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on have it checked and replaced if necessary If a lamp in the instrument cluster re mains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving refer to Lamps in instrument cluster gt page 350 3 Starting position Getting started Unlocking a When you switch on ignition the indicato
30. To check the engine oil level via the multifunction display do the following gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 The standard display gt page 125 should appear in the multifunction display gt Press button BV or EAN on the multifunction steering wheel until the following message is seen in the multi function display Engine oil level Messurement I Progress Vehicle must be level for correct measurement P54 32 7398 31 One of the following messages will subsequently appear in the multifunc tion display e Engine oil level OK e Add 1 0 qt engine oil for max oil level Canada 1 0 1 e Add 1 5 gts engine oil for max oil level Canada 1 5 1 Operation Engine compartment e Add 2 0 qts engine oil for max oil level Canada 2 0 1 If you want to interrupt the checking procedure press the RA or EN button on the multifunction steering wheel gt If necessary add engine oil For adding engine oil see gt page 300 For more information on engine oil see the Technical data section gt page 436 and gt page 437 Other display messages If the SmartKey is not turned to position 2 in the starter switch the following message will appear Switch ignition on to check engine oil level gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 Operation Engine compartment If you see the message Observe waiting time gt If engine is at operating
31. Warning A N Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi nated can result in an accident Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on Don t add brake fluid before checking the brake system Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You can be seriously burned Practical hints What to do if Possible cause consequence Suggested solution You are driving with the parking brake set Release the parking brake gt page 46 There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser Risk of accident Carefully stop the vehi voir cle and notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not add brake fluid This will not solve the prob lem Ea If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution USA only There is a malfunction in gt Have the vehicle checked as soon as pos Cal Canada only e The fuel management system pilin anon Mere Lele Bene The yellow engine malfunction e The ignition system An on board diagnostic connector is used indicator lamp comes on while The emission control system by the service station to link the vehicle to driving l no the shop diagnostics system It allows the e Sys
32. When replacing batteries always replace both batteries of both SmartKeys The required replacement batteries are available at any Mercedes Benz Center SmartKey b Insert the mechanical key 1 in direc tion of arrow in side opening Replacement batteries Lithium type CR 2025 or equivalent gt Using mechanical key C push gray slide 2 to unlatch battery compart ment G gt Pull battery compartment out of the housing in direction of arrow NE gt Remove the mechanical key gt page 386 P60 35 2238 31 1 Mechanical key 2 Slide 3 Battery compartment P80 35 2239 31 4 Battery Contact spring gt Remove the batteries 4 in direction of arrow Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries Using a lint free cloth insert new batteries 4 under the contact spring with the positive terminal side facing up Return battery compartment 3 into housing until it locks into place Slide mechanical key Q back into the SmartKey Check the operation of the SmartKey Practical hints Replacing bulbs Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling It is there fore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all times Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced See an authorized Mercedes Ben
33. against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt Warning A N Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted P40 10 3165 31 gt Guide spare wheel onto the alignment Wheel bolt for light alloy rims Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts bolt and push it on P40 10 3342 31 Wheel bolt for spare wheel with Rd Ge alee enn ak einanaibe gt Insert wheel bolts and tighten them collapsible tire located in trunk with repaired immediately Do not continue to slightly sis spare wheel drive under these circumstances Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call i Roadside Assistance Wheel bolts 2 must be used when Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight mounting the spare wheel The use of ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to any wheel bolts other than wheel come off This could cause an accident bolts 2 for the spare wheel will physi Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts cally damage the vehicle s brakes gt Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub Practical hints Flat tire P40 10 3343 31 gt Unscrew the alignment bolt install last wheel bolt and tighten slightly Warning TEX Only use genuine equipment Mercedes Benz wheel bolts Other wheel bolts may come loose Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised Otherwise the vehicle could fall off the jack Inflating the collapsible tire Warning A N Inflate collapsible
34. dow cleaning solution on all outside and inside glass surfaces An automotive glass cleaner is recom mended Operation Vehicle care Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield To clean the window interior do not use a dry cloth abrasives solvents or cleaners containing solvents Do not touch the inside of the front rear or side windows with hard objects such as an ice scraper or ring Doing so may damage the windows Operation Vehicle care Light alloy wheels If possible clean wheels once a week gt Use Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water for cleaning the light al loy wheels Only use acid free cleaning materials Acid may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat The vehicle should not be parked for an extended period of time immediately after it has been cleaned especially not after the wheel rims have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased corro sion of the brake disks and brake pads Therefore the vehicle s brake system should always be warmed up before it is parked after cleaning To do so please drive your vehicle for several minutes to allow the brakes to dry When applying Merced
35. function Warning A N The speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions per mit Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to preset speed could cause an accident and or seri ous injury to you and others gt Briefly push cruise control lever to position 4 The cruise control resumes the last set speed gt Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Controls in detail Loading Roof rack T Load the roof rack in such a way that the vehicle cannot be damaged while Saming A driving Only use roof racks approved by Make sure Mercedes Benz for your vehicle model to e you can fully raise the tilt sliding avoid damage to the vehicle sunroof Follow the manufacturer s installation in structions Otherwise an improperly at tached roof rack system or its load could gt Mount the roof rack only between the e you can fully open the trunk become detached from the vehicle fastening points see arrows Do not exceed the maximum roof load of gt Secure the roof rack according to 220 Ib 100 kg manufacturer s instructions for installation Take into consideration that when the roof rack is loaded the handling characteristics are different from those when operating the vehicles without the roof rack loaded Ski sack Canada only Unfolding and loading gt Fold armrest 3 down arrow Do not sit on or lean your body we
36. on and the engine is turned manually Closing Warning JN Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone gt Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft 30 cm The hood will lock audibly gt Check to make sure the hood is fully closed If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps then it is not properly closed Open it again and let it drop with somewhat greater force Engine oil The amount of oil your engine needs will depend on a number of factors including driving style Higher oil consumption can occur when e the vehicle is new e the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break in period Do not use any special lubricant addi tives as these may damage the drive assemblies Using special additives not approved by Mercedes Benz may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty More information on this subject is available at any Mercedes Benz Center Checking engine oil level with the control system When checking the oil level e the vehicle must be parked on level ground e with the engine at operating tempera ture the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 5 minutes with the engine turned off e with the engine not at operating tem perature yet the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 30 minutes with the engine turned off
37. original part See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further informa tion If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted e The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged e The operating clearance of the wheels and the tires may no longer be correct Warning AN Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have sustained damage replace them When replacing rims only use genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident Retreaded tires are not tested or recom mended by Mercedes Benz since previous damage cannot always be recognized on re treads The operating safety of the vehicle cannot be assured when such tires are used Operation Tires and wheels Important guidelines e Only use sets of tires and rims of the same type and make e Tires must be of the correct size for the rim e Break in new tires for approximately 60 miles 100 km at moderate speeds e Regularly check the tires and rims for damage Dented or bent rims can cause tire inflation pressure loss and damage to the tire beads e If vehicle is heavily loaded check tire inflation pressure and correct as required e Do not allow your tires to wear down too far Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under ve in 3 mm e When replacing individ
38. other reason with gear selector lever in N can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning A N Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous Also position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P gt page 54 When parked on an incline turn the front wheels towards the road curb Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Warning VAN When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could move the gear selector lever from position P which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Driving tips Accelerator position Your driving style influences the transmission s shifting behavior Less throttle Earlier upshifting More throttle Later upshifting Kickdown Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration gt Press the accelerator past the point of resistance The transmission shifts into a lower gear gt
39. roof f P77 00 2230 31 Screen Sunroof switch In a vehicle rollover occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment 1 Push up to raise sunroof at rear 2 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear 3 Push forward to slide sunroof closed 4 Push back to slide sunroof open When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and or serious personal injury To avoid damaging the seals do not transport any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the tilt sliding sunroof Do not open the tilt sliding sunroof if there is snow or ice on the roof as this could result in malfunctions The tilt sliding sunroof can be opened or closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur gt page 389 You can also open or close the tilt slid ing sunroof using the SmartKey see Summer opening feature gt page 241 and Convenience clos ing feature gt page 241 Depending on current position the tilt sliding sunroof may also open or close
40. vehicle not facing the wind A The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice Warning For more information see Winter driving gt page 336 Operation Driving instructions Standing water Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth Before driving through water determine its depth Never accelerate before driving into water The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equip ment thus damaging them If you must drive through standing wa ter drive slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment Water in these areas could cause damage to electrical components or wiring of the engine or transmission or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake causing severe internal engine damage Any such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Operation Driving instructions Passenger compartment Warning AN Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle The
41. 10 3340 31 gt On wheel to be changed loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts approximately one full turn with wrench gt D Practical hints Flat tire gt gt The jack take up brackets are located Removing the wheel directly behind the front wheel housings p p and in front of the rear wheel housings P40 00 2040 31 gt Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a P40 10 3341 31 maximum of 1 2 in 3 cm from the C Alignment bolt BAD Oa round Never start engine while 8 N amp gt Unscrew upper most wheel bolt and 1 Take up bracket vehicle is raised remove 2 Jack l gt Replace this wheel bolt with alignment gt Place jack on firm ground Warning A N i bolt supplied in the tool kit gt Position jack 2 under take up a The jack is intended only for lifting the gt Remove the remaining bolts bracket 1 so that it is always vertical vehicle briefly for wheel changes It is not plumb line as seen from the side i T fth hicle i ked suited for performing maintenance work even If the vehicle is parkea on an deha venice Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt incline This could result in damage to the bolts e Never start the engine when the vehicle 8 and wheel hub threads is raised e Never lie down under the raised vehicle gt Remove the wheel Practical hints Flat tire Mounting the spare wheel Ba To avoid paint damage place wheel flat
42. 1000 miles 1500 km after the engine or the rear differential has been replaced Always obey applicable speed limits Operation Driving instructions Y Driving instructions Drive sensibly save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals Fuel consumption to a great extent depends on driving habits and operating Warning A N Warning A N conditions n E To save fuel you should Dane and driving and or taking oie Make a that ees no objects are ob and driving are very dangerous combina structing the pedals range of movement e Keep tires at the recommended tire tions Even a small amount of alcohol or Keep the driver s footwell clear of all obsta inflation pressures drugs can affect your reflexes perceptions cles If there are any floormats or carpets in and judgment the footwell make sure that the pedals still e Remove unnecessary loads The possibility of a serious or even fatal have sufficient clearance accident are greatly increased when you e Remove roof rack when not in use e Allow engine to warm up under low drink or take drugs and drive Power assistance oat Une Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow e Avoid frequent acceleration and decel anyone to drive who has been drinking or eration taking drugs warning A e Have all maintenance work performed With the engine not running there is no at the intervals specified in the power assistance for the brake and steering Maintenance Booklet
43. 2 Activating override switch 3 Override switch P54 25 3944 31 A Activate the override switch when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle The children may otherwise injure them selves e g by becoming trapped in the win dow opening Warning When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and or serious personal injury Activating override switch gt Slide override switch 3 to the right The rear door windows can no longer be operated using the respective switch located in the rear doors Operation of the rear door windows with the switches located on the door control panel of the driver s door is still possible Deactivating override switch gt Slide override switch 3 to the left The rear door windows can be operated again using the respective switch located in the rear doors For more information see Power win dows gt page 238 Vv Panic alarm An audible alarm and flashing exterior lamps will operate for approximately va minutes P80 35 2088 31 button o Canada only Only vehicles equipped with an anti theft alarm system have SmartKeys with integrated panic button Q a USA only This device complies with P
44. 267 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 272 System self check 266 Telematics 448 Telephone 26 263 Answering ending acall 153 Hands free microphone 29 Message in display 379 Operation 152 223 Phone book 153 Redialing 154 Temperature Display mode 130 Interior temperature 178 Temperature Tires 316 Tether attachment points see Children in the vehicle Tie down rings Trunk 255 Tightening torque Wheel bolts 410 448 Tilt sliding sunroof see Power tilt sliding sunroof Time 140 TIN 333 Tire and Loading Information Placard 309 Tire and loading Information Terminology 331 Tires 305 429 Air pressure 331 Care and maintenance 306 Chains 337 Cleaning 307 342 Direction of rotation 308 Driving instructions 286 Important notes Tire inflation pressure 316 Inflation pressure 295 315 317 Information Placard 309 Tire Identification Number see TIN Traction 287 Tread 334 Tread depth 307 336 Treadwear indicators 334 Vehicle maximum load on 334 Wear pattern 335 Winter 336 Tools 380 Top tether Children in the vehicle 77 Trunk Closing the lid 101 Fuse box 422 Lamp 121 Message in display 379 Opening 98 99 100 Tie down rings 255 Trunk emergency release 102 Unlocking inan emergency 102 Turn signal lamps Messages in display 377 Inspection 306 Replacing bulbs 395 396 Load rating 334 Ply composition and material used 334 Problems under overinflation 320 Retreads 305 Rims and tires 429 R
45. 76 Tele Aid 266 service and Warranty Booklet Loss of 425 Service and warranty information 10 Service intervals see Maintenance service indicator 338 Service life tires 306 Service see Maintenance Service system see FSS Canada vehicles or Mainte nance System U S vehicles 338 Service System see FSS Service Parts 424 Settings Control system menus and submenus 128 129 Date 142 143 Factory SmartKey 96 Individual SmartKey 96 Individual Vehicle 135 Lighting control system 144 Memory function 111 Menus and submenus 127 Resetting all control system 136 Selective SmartKey 96 Time 140 141 Shelf below rear window cleaning 347 Shift lever position indicator Shift lock 447 Shift program manual Automatic transmission 165 Shift program mode Automatic transmission 125 Shifting 155 Automatic transmission 45 Into optimal gear range automatic transmission 162 Side impact air bags front and rear 125 156 66 Side marker lamps Cleaning lenses 344 Messages in display 374 Replacing bulbs 400 Side windows see Power windows sidewall 333 Ski sack Canada only 249 Ski sack Canada only 251 252 SmartKey see Key SmartKey Snow chains 337 sound system 202 Spare fuses 420 Spare wheel 433 Bolts 385 Mounting 404 Speed settings Cruise control 247 Speedometer 25 138 Split rear bench seat SRS 68 447 Indicator lamp 25 356 Message in display 363 Standing lamps Replacing bulbs 395 3
46. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat Air bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated Do not touch In addition improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians Contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center e For your protection and the protection of others when scrapping the air bag unit or emergency tensioning device our safety instructions must be fol lowed These instructions are available from your authorized Mercedes Benz Center e Given the considerable deployment speed required inflation volume and the textile structure of the air bags there is the possibility of abrasions or other potentially more serious injuries resulting from air bag deployment When you sell your vehicle we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator s Manual Safety and Security Occupant safety Front air bags 1 Driver s air bag 2 Passenger front air bag Driver and front passenger air bags are deployed e inthe event of a frontal impact e if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold e independently of the front side impact air bags and or rear side impact air bags Safety and Security Occupant safety The
47. At the gas station eee 293 Roof rack stcesestcerconsaretenasetowatiaiee 248 Operation eesse 281 Refueling eeeeeeeerrererresee 293 Ski sack Canada only 005 249 The first 1000 miles 1500 km 282 Check regularly and before a Split rear bench seat c ce 252 Driving instructionsS ccceeeeeeeees 283 lone Desseria 294 Loading instructions 00006 254 Drive sensibly save fuel 283 Engine compartment secere 297 Cargo tie down rings 008 255 Drinking and riving ceeeeee 283 FOC E P N A A A E A 297 Useful features ccccccccccccccccccenccce 256 BEL 6 Cine nn riran 283 ENSING Ol esesanseuaaneneaqdeenedeacuanen mass 298 Storage compartments 256 Power ASSISTANCE ecce 283 Transmission fluid level 301 Cup holders cece ceeeeeeeeeseeeeees 258 Bi AOS SNIE E TAE 284 Coolant level oo eee eeeceeeeeeeee 301 POST VEGAN S enna 260 Driving Off 0 eeccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeees 285 PE Oy sceoin aeons icone siancenad 303 Cigarette lighter 0000008 262 F CIVIC IAI e E EA E 285 Windshield washer system and Power OUtICt OO 263 IIS TOSS EEEE A 286 headlamp cleaning system 304 Tel PhONne ceeeeeeesssesseseeeeeeeens 263 Hydroplaning cccccceessseeeeeees 287 Tires and wheels ssssecccceeeeeees 305 TIEA sE 264 TWEE ACTON cates sanectevceueeSasssivuseeseioess 287 Important guidelin
48. Ease on the accelerator when you have reached the desired speed The transmission shifts up again Stopping When you stop briefly e g at traffic lights gt Leave the transmission in gear gt Hold the vehicle with the brake When you stop longer with the engine idling and or on an hill gt Set the parking brake gt Move the gear selector lever to position P Maneuvering When you maneuver in tight areas e g when pulling into a parking space gt Control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes Accelerate gently Never abruptly step on the accelerator Controls in detail Automatic transmission Working on the vehicle A Warning When working on the vehicle set the parking brake and move gear selector lever to position P Otherwise the vehicle could roll away Controls in detail Automatic transmission Gear ranges With the gear selector lever in position D and driving in the automatic shift program C or S gt page 161 you can select a gear range for the automatic transmission to operate within Gear selector lever gt page 162 You can limit the gear range by pressing the gear selector lever to the left D and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the gear selector lever to the right D Steering wheel gearshift control gt page 163 You can limit the gear range by pressing the respective downshift button on the steering wheel gearshif
49. MUTO aonr aE E 40 DIVINE aenneren 42 Fastening the seat belt 42 Starting the engine sssenssenseseess 45 Parking brake wcrscnissecsntenntedsedenatios 46 DIVINE gaeresoimsrneiieirseier iiinis 47 Switching on headlamps 48 Turn signals dnsoucsmsnveesteateneeravavensieess 49 Windshield WIpePS ccseeceeeecees 50 Problems while driving 00000000 52 Parking and lOCKING ccccceseeeeeeeees 54 Parking Drake sssnssenseseessseesseeesse 54 Switching off headlamps 59 Turning off Engine cecccceeseeeees 56 Releasing seat belts cccce 56 LOCKINE usichatintescnetheacerpsinsatetneduedegtee 56 SRE Safety and Security Occupant safety Active head restraint Children in the vehicle Blocking of rear door window Driving safety SYStEMS ccccceeeeeeees Anti theft systems Anti theft alarm system Tow away alarm Controls in detail c cess 93 Locking and UNnIOCKING seeeeeeeee 94 SmartKey sicrcevevsssedenessannwerveriermrvtouse 94 Opening the doors from the inside iecicnetsvceneesanesavrerenenesseanias 99 Opening the trunk cccseeeeeeees 99 Closing the trunk ccsecceeeeee 101 Trunk emergency release 102 Valet locking scsscccesesceeeeees 103 Automatic central locking 103 Locking and unlocking from the INSICO cascawersascrassostaasewe
50. Manual C Comfort S Sport For manual gear shifting For comfort driving For standard driving Controls in detail Automatic transmission The current gear selector lever position and the selected program mode M C S are indicated in the multifunction display gt page 156 modes C or S see Automatic shift lever one touch gearshifting gt page 162 and Steering wheel ing gt page 163 For information on automatic program program gt page 161 Gear selector gearshift control one touch gearshift Activating manual shift program gt Press program mode selector switch Q repeatedly until the M for the manual program mode M appears in the multifunction display The transmission switches to the manual program mode M Automatic shifting is switched off The gear range is not limited You can change the gears manually when the gear selector lever is in position D You can upshift or downshift through the gears in Succession The manual program mode M will not be stored When the engine is turned off with the manual program mode M selected the transmission will go to the automatic program mode C or S when the engine is restarted Upshifting In the manual program mode M the transmission will not upshift even if the engine has reached its overrevving range Shift up to the next gear before the engine has reached its overrevving range Make a
51. Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow G until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel Seat height gt Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 2 Head restraint height gt Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 1 Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible Warning A N For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Adjust head restraint so that the head re straint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an ac cident or similar situation Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident Getting started Adjusting Head restraint tilt A T AL P 1 16 2355 Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint gt Push or pull on the lower edge of the head restraint cushion For more information see Seats gt page 106 Getting started Adjusting Steering wheel Steering wheel adjustment electrical a The lever for the electrical steering wheel The memory function gt page 111 lets Kanna A adjustment is located on the lower left of you store the settings for the power SDS the steering column seat the steering wheel adjustment and the exterior rear view mirrors Do n
52. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Mo tor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Tire ply material 1 Plies in sidewall 2 Plies under tread o For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration This marking tells you about the type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread Tire and loading terminology Accessory weight The combined weight in excess of those standard items which may be replaced of automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats radio and heater to the extent that these items are available as factory installed equipment whether installed or not Air pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa or bar Operation Tires and wheels Aspect ratio Dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width expressed in percenta
53. The power outlet is located in the rear pas with a Ouan or attached antenna i e with senger compartment The power outlet can be used to out being connected to an external antenna accommodate 12V DC electrical ac from inside the vehicle while the engine is cessories e g air pump auxiliary running Doing so could lead to a malfunc lamps up to a maximum of 180 W tion of the vehicle s electronic system pos sibly resulting in an accident and personal injury Radio transmitters such as a portable tele phone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are con i P82 00 2273 31 nected to an antenna that is installed on Q Power outlet the outside of the vehicle 2 Cover The external antenna must be approved by Mercedes Benz Please contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for informa tion on the installation of an approved external antenna Refer to the radio trans mitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna Controls in detail Useful features A Please do not forget that your primary re sponsibility is to drive the vehicle A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we rec ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a tele phone call Warning If you choose to use the telephone while driving please use the hands free devic
54. according to manufactur er s instructions The child seat must be firmly attached in the right and left side anchors Q An incorrectly mounted child seat may come loose during an accident which could result in serious injury or death to the child Damaged or impact damaged child seats or child seat mounting fittings must be replaced Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle even if the children are secured in a child restraint system With a child seat installed in the left rear seat the seat belt for the center seat occupied by a passenger must op erate freely Guide seat belt between its seat cushion mount and backrest mount along outside of right side child seat anchor Safety and Security Occupant safety Non LATCH type child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle s seat belt system Install child seat according to the manufacturer s instructions The LATCH type anchors are located be tween the seat cushion and the backrest P9TM2 2786 31 Anchors gt Install child seat according to the manufacturer s instructions Safety and Security Occupant safety Blocking of rear door window operation You can block the rear door window operation for instance when you have children riding in the rear passenger compartment The override switch is located on the door control panel of the driver s door 1 Deactivating override switch
55. air bag It should be noted that with respect to both front side impact air bags and rear side im pact air bags there is a possibility for a side air bag related injury if occupants especial ly children are not properly seated or re strained when next to a side air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job To help avoid the possibility of injury please follow these guidelines 1 Occupants especially children should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the front side impact air bag and or rear side impact air bag inflates This could result in serious injuries or death should the front side impact air bag and or rear side impact air bag be activated 2 Always sit nearly upright properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or child restraint system for all children 12 years old or under 3 Always wear seat belts properly If you believe that even with the use of these guidelines it would be safer for your rear seat occupants to have both rear door mounted side air bags deactivated then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written request to do so at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center at an additional cost Safety and Security Occupant safety Please contact your local authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 for details A
56. and as required systems In this case it is important to keep by the maintenance service display in mind that a considerably higher degree of Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz effort is necessary to brake and steer the Center vehicle Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather in stop and go traffic on short trips and in hilly area Operation Driving instructions Brakes A After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through wa ter deep enough to wet brake components the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking ef fect Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front Warning Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby significantly reducing their effec tiveness It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci dent To help prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces particularly salted roads it is advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking The heat generated serves to dry the brakes If your brake system is normally only subject to moderate loads you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above normal braking pressure at higher speeds This will also enha
57. audio system or in vehicles with audio system or in vehicles with COMAND if the time synchronization with Date COMAND if the time synchronization with head unit feature was set to Off set day head unit feature was set to Off W 0122004 Vehicles with COMAND Vehicles with COMAND For information on setting the date D For information on setting the date refer to the separate COMAND refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions operating instructions P54 32 2370 31 gt Press button or E to set the gt Move the selection marker with Move the selection marker with button JES or BMJ tothe Time Date 99 button EI or ER to the Time Date submenu submenu gt Press button FANG or A repeatedly gt Press button EAN or Red repeatedly until the message Date Set day until the message Date Set YY appears appears in the multifunction display in the multifunction display gt D Controls in detail Control system gt gt The selection marker is on the year setting P54 92 2372 31 gt Press button or E to set the year Lighting submenu Access the Lighting submenu via the Settings menu Use the Lighting submenu to change the lamp and lighting settings on your vehicle The following functions are available Function Page Set daytime running lamp mode 144 USA only Set locator lighting 145 Set night security illumination 146 Set interior lighting delayed 147 shut off Set d
58. authorized Mercedes Benz Center Keep the fuse boxes free by contamina tion and wetness Otherwise electrical parts or systems could be damaged The electrical fuses are located in different fuse boxes e Main fuse box in passenger compartment gt page 421 e Fuse box in engine compartment gt page 421 e Fuse box in trunk gt page 422 Aids for replacing fuses Fuse chart The fuse chart is located in the main fuse box in the passenger compartment gt page 421 The amperages of the fuses are also given there Spare fuses Spare fuses are located in the vehicle tool kit in the trunk gt page 380 Fuse extractor The fuse extractor is located in the fuse box cover in the trunk gt page 422 Main fuse box in passenger compartment The main fuse box is located in the passen ger compartment on the driver s side of the cockpit 1 Main fuse box cover Opening fuse box gt Open the drivers door gt Pull fuse box cover Q open with a screw driver or similar tool see arrow gt Remove fuse box cover 1 rearward Closing fuse box gt Attach fuse box cover Q in the front gt Fold fuse box cover Q in until it engages Fuse box in engine compartment The fuse box is located in the engine compartment on the driver s side 1 Cover 2 Screws 3 Retainer Practical hints Fuses Removing cover gt Twist screws 2 90 counterclockwise
59. bag when it is properly installed Other wise they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash If this happens serious or fatal injury will result According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing positions Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system which is properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt and top tether strap or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap fully in accordance with the child seat manufactur er s instructions Occupants especially children should nev er place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door or the rear side trim panel where the front side impact air bag and or the rear side impact air bag in flates This could result in serious injuries or death should the air bag be triggered Al ways sit nearly upright properly use the seat belts and appropriate size infant or child restraint system Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant During an accident they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Children too big for child restraint systems mu
60. belt and make sure that it is prop erly positioned on your body Since the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag Occupants who are unbelted out of position or too close to the air bag can be seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye e Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest b gt gt D Safety and Security Occupant safety Adjust the driver seat as far as possible rearward still permitting proper opera tion of vehicle controls The distance from the center of the driver s breast bone to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 in 25 cm or more You should be able to accomplish this by a combina tion of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel If you have any prob lems please see an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not lean with your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dash board Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim Placing hands and arms in side the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand arm injury when driver front air bag inflates Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied Occupants especially children should never place
61. bulb gt vY v vy Yy Press the clamp on housing cover 2 and remove it Pull out bulb socket with the bulb Pull the bulb out of bulb socket Press the new bulb into bulb socket Press bulb socket 6 back into the lamp Align housing cover 2 and press until it engages Bi Xenon headlamp Warning A N Do not remove the cover Q for the Bi Xenon headlamp Because of high voltage in Bi Xenon lamps it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its compo Practical hints Replacing bulbs High beam flasher bulb gt Press the clamp on housing cover 2 and remove it Pull the electrical connector off gt Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and take out the bulb gt Insert the new bulb so that its socket nents We recommend that you have such P82 30 2333 31 locates in the recess of the lamp work done by a qualified technician l housing 3 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb 4 Bulb socket for high beam flasher bulb gt Turn bulb socket clockwise until it Bulb socket for parking and standing engages lamp bulb gt Plug the electrical connector onto the bulb gt Align housing cover 2 and press until it engages PB2 30 2332 31 1 Housing cover for Bi Xenon headlamp 2 Housing cover for high beam flasher parking and standing lamp Practical hints Replacing bulbs Front turn signal lamp bulb gt Turn bulb socket G with t
62. burned Warning Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above freezing point use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit and water e 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water 1 34 fl oz 40 ml MB SummerFit to 1 gallon 4 0 I water For temperatures below freezing point use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit and commercially avail able premixed windshield washer sol vent antifreeze e 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts solvent 1 34 fl oz 40 ml MB SummerFit to 1 gallon 4 0 I solvent ABS Antilock Brake System Prevents the wheels from locking up during braking so that the vehicle can continue to be steered Accessory weight gt page 331 Air pressure gt page 331 Alignment bolt Metal pin with thread The centering pin is an aid used when changing a tire to align the wheel with the wheel hub Aspect ratio gt page 331 BabySmart system This system detects if a special system compatible child restraint seat is installed on the front passenger seat The system will automatically deactivate the passenger front air bag when such a seat is properly installed the EA Be indicator lamp located air bag deactivation in the center console comes on and re mains illuminated BabySmart compatible child seats Special restraint system for children The sensor system for the passenger seat prevents depl
63. changing gears manually Gear selector lever position Effect Park position Gear selector lever position when the vehicle is parked Place gear selector lever in position P only when vehicle is stopped The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked Rather the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to placing the gear selector lever in position P to secure the vehicle Effect The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P With the SmartKey removed the gear selector lever is locked in position P If the vehicle s electrical system is malfunctioning the gear selector lever could remain locked in position P gt page 388 Reverse gear Place gear selector lever in position R only when vehicle is stopped Controls in detail Automatic transmission Effect Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes are released the vehicle can be moved freely pushed or towed To avoid damage to the trans mission never engage N while driving If the ESP is deactivated or malfunctioning Move gear selector lever to N only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads Drive The transmission shifts automatically All five forward gears are available Controls in detail Automatic transmission Coasting the vehicle or driving for any
64. check installation of the child seat gt If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not use the BabySmart restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired Practical hints What to do if Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display Warning and malfunction messages appear in the multifunction display located in the instrument cluster Certain warning and malfunction messag es are accompanied by an audible signal Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this Operator s Manual Selecting the vehicle status message memory menu in the control system gt page 134 displays both cleared and uncleared messages High priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button gt page 122 or button A Red m z or on the steering wheel Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button gt page 122 or button EAN ed fae or on the steering wheel They are then stored in the vehicle status message memory gt page 134 Remember that clearing a message will only make the message dis
65. checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to address the mal function and warning messages gt page 358 gt Press button or repeatedly until the vehicle status message memory appears in the multifunction display If the vehicle status message memory menu does not appear then there are no messages stored Controls in detail Control system Vehicle status messages have been Should the vehicle s system record any Settings menu recorded conditions while driving the number of mA i i i In the Settings menu there are two If conditions have occurred causing status i APPA TAA E mutung tion display when the SmartKey in the functions messages to be recorded the number of messages appears in the multifunction starter switch is turned to position O or l e The function Reset to factory removed from the starter switch display settings with which you can reset all the settings to the original factory settings The vehicle status message memory will be cleared when you turn the e A collection of submenus with which a SmartKey in the starter switch to you can make individual settings for position 1 or 2 You will then only see your vehicle aaa re high priority messages in the multi gt Press button or repeatedly _ function display gt page 358 until the Settings menu appears in the multifunction display P 4 32 2957 31 1 Number of messages Sett
66. climate control Radio operation cccceseceeeeees 205 Canada Only siesterssuswnesyiecesstaddestarienecss 184 Introduction to satellite radio Deactivating the automatic PU SA OMY asarna nnar 209 climate control system 187 CD IMOOG srar a aN 214 Operating the automatic climate GSM network phones 56 223 control system in automatic mode 187 TDMA or CDMA network phones 229 Setting the temperature 188 Emergency calls 911 ou 235 Adjusting air distribution 189 Power WINDOWS 2 csecastasncevcsecachaavigeesess 238 Adjusting air volume cccseeeee 190 Opening and closing the windows 238 Front defroster cccccsssseeeeees 190 Synchronizing power windows 240 Maximum cooling MAXCOOL 191 Summer opening feature 241 Air recirculation mode 0066 191 Convenience closing feature 241 Charcoal filter ciccnckeassestescaresevenacens 193 Power tilt sliding sunroof 242 Air CONGITIONING sicssesccesesccccevonsseeetes 194 Opening and closing the power Residual heat and ventilation 195 tilt sliding SUNOOF ceeee eens 242 Rear passenger compartment synchronizing the power adjustable air vents ccccceeee 196 tilt sliding SUNOOF ceeee eee 244 Driving SYSTEMS ccceeeccccseecceeeeeeees 245 Cruise control esceseeeescereees 245 LOGIN O ea E 248 E
67. emergency braking situation is over The ABS will prevent the wheels from locking When you release the brake pedal the brakes function again as normal The BAS is then deactivated Warning A N If the BAS is malfunctioning the brake sys tem is still functioning normally but without the additional brake boost available that BAS would normally provide in an emergen cy braking maneuver Therefore the braking distance may increase Warning VAN The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or danger ous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP The Electronic Stability Program ESP is operational as soon as the engine Is run ning and monitors the vehicle s traction force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface and handling The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting the engine output the ESP
68. ers are turned on The seat heating switches off automatically The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available Y Memory function Prior to operating the vehicle the driver should check and adjust the seat height seat position fore and aft and seat back rest angle if necessary to ensure adequate control reach and comfort The head re straint should also be adjusted for proper height See also the section on air bags gt page 61 for proper seat positioning In addition adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control reach operation and comfort Both the interior and exterior rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision Fasten seat belts Infants and small chil dren should be seated in a properly se cured restraint system that complies with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Mo tor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210 2 With the memory function you can store up to three different settings The following settings are stored for the driver s seat when using the buttons on the driver s door e Drivers seat backrest and head restraint position e Steering wheel position e Exterior rear view mirrors Controls in detail Memory function The following settings are stored for the front passenger seat when using the but tons if so equipped depending on vehicle equipment configuration on t
69. functions within each menu as being arranged in a circular pattern e If you press button or repeatedly you will pass through each menu one after the other e Ifyou press button BV or Bay repeatedly you will pass through each function display one after the other in the current menu In the Settings menu instead of functions you will find a number of submenus for calling up and changing settings For instructions on using these submenus see Submenus in the Settings menu gt page 136 The number of menus available in the sys tem depends on which optional equipment is installed in your vehicle Controls in detail Control system The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the system and are not neces sarily identical to those shown in the control system displays The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system you are in Controls in detail Control system Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an through the menus overview of the individual menus settings To reset Press reset button for 3 sec P54 32 3416 31 Menus submenus and functions Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Standard AUDIO NAV Vehicle status display message memory gt page 130 gt page 131 gt page 134 gt page 134 Run Flat Select radio Show route g
70. gt Press button You are connected to the second caller the first caller is kept on hold Terminating a call gt Press button The current call is terminated The connection to the caller previously kept on hold is also interrupted however reconnection is indicated by an acoustic signal Combining two calls gt Press button The calls are combined into one call Terminating a combined call gt Press button The connection to both callers is terminated Controls in detail Audio system Emergency calls 911 The following describes how to dial a 911 emergency call using the audio system head unit when a Mercedes Benz specified mobile phone is inserted in the phone cradle Unless otherwise specified the descriptions refer to the audio system head unit Consult the separate telephone operating instructions that came with your mobile phone for information on how to place a 911 emergency call on the mobile phone Warning A N The 911 emergency call system is a public service Using it without due cause is a crim inal offense Controls in detail Audio system The following conditions must be met for a 911 emergency call Telephone must be switched on The corresponding mobile communica tions network must be available Emergency calls may not be possible with all telephone networks or if certain network services and or telephone fu
71. han dling characteristics change when driving with a spare wheel mounted Adapt your driving style accordingly Warning The spare wheel is for temporary use only When driving with spare wheel mounted ensure proper tire pressure and do not ex ceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph 80 km h Drive to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible to have the spare wheel replaced with a regular road wheel Never operate the vehicle with more than one spare wheel mounted Do not switch off the ESP when a spare wheel is mounted Preparing the vehicle gt vvvy Yy Mounting the spare wheel Park the vehicle in a safe distance from moving traffic on a hard flat surface when possible Preparing the vehicle Prepare the vehicle as described Turn on the hazard warning flasher gt page 494 gt page 119 gt Take the collapsible tire wheel wrench wheel bolts jack and electric air pump Turn the steering wheel so that the out of the trunk gt page 380 front wheels are in a straight ahead position Set the parking brake gt page 54 Move the gear selector lever to P Turn off the engine gt page 56 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway Open doors only when conditions are safe to do so Lifting the vehicle gt Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chocks or oth
72. help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents includ ing rollovers The integrated restraint system includes SRS driver air bag passenger front air bag front side im pact air bags rear side impact air bags head protection window cur tain air bags for side windows ETD seat belt emergency tensioning device and front seat knee bolsters The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted oc cupants in certain frontal front air bags and ETD and side front side impact air bags rear side impact air bags win dow curtain air bags and ETD impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds Seat belts can only work when used properly Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this sec tion as that could result in serious inju ries in case of an accident Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm against your neck or off your shoul der In a crash your body would move too far forward That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen which could se verely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing such as eyeglasses pens keys etc as these might cause injuries Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdo men If the belt is positioned across
73. in detail Audio system Manual tuning Scan search Station memory gt Select desired waveband e Starting scan search You can store ten AM and ten FM stations gt Press RZA or button for approx gt Select desired waveband RAE ENON 3 seconds e Storing stations gt Press button repeatedly until desired gt Tune in desired station frequency has been reached gt Press and hold desired station button J to QM until a brief signal tone is heard Step by step station tuning takes place in ascending or descending order Each time the button is pressed the radio The frequency is stored on the tunes further by 0 2 MHz During Renee selected station eur manual tuning the radio is muted gt Press SC soft key SC will appear in the display The Palle Up Staiong Automatic seek tuning radio briefly tunes in all receivable gt Press desired station button E gt Select desired waveband stations on the waveband selected to EO briefly gt Press or button briefly e Ending scan search The radio will tune to the next highest gt Press SC soft key or or peda or next lowest receivable frequency The station last played will be selected and SC disappears from the display If no station is received after two consecutive scans of the complete frequency range then the scan stops at the frequency from which it began Controls in detail Audio system Autostore automatic station memory The Autostore memo
74. in detail Climate control Air conditioning The cooling function only operational when the engine is running cools the vehi cle interior down to the selected tempera ture The cooling function also dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior thus preventing the windows from fogging up I O Condensation may drip out from under neath the vehicle This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction A If you turn off the cooling function the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm The windows can fog up more quickly Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others Warning Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air condi tioning cooling function of the climate control system The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified gt Press button gt page 175 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The cooling function switches off after a short delay Activating Moist air can fog up the windows You can dehumidify the air with the air condition ing gt Press button gt page 175 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer H If the air conditioning cannot be turned on again this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant The compressor has turned itself off Have
75. lid gt pag gt Pull release handle 2 gt Fold seat cushion G forward gt Fold backrest forward Always release the seat cushion and fold it forward before folding the seat backrests forward Otherwise the backrest covering may be damaged Controls in detail Loading Returning the backrest to original position c 7 m If the backrest is not locked into position a red indicator will be visible gt Fold backrest 2 rearward until it engages gt Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the backrest gt Fold seat cushion Q rearward until it locks into position Controls in detail Loading Warning A N If a red indicator is visible with the backrest up then the backrest is not properly locked into position Always lock backrest in its upright position when rear seat bench is occupied cargo is being carried in the trunk or the extended cargo compartment is not in use Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the backrest In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver exercise care when transporting cargo To prevent unauthorized persons from access to the trunk always lo
76. light from oncoming traffic e the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions To minimize risk to you and to others activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to when driving or when traffic and or ambient lighting conditions require you to do So In low ambient lighting conditions only switch from position Wg to with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location Switching from Wg to will briefly switch off the headlamps Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident Controls in detail Lighting The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle s lights at all times gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position Bag With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 only the parking lamps will switch on and off automatically When the engine Is running the low beam headlamps the tail and parking lamps the license plate lamps and the side marker lamps will switch on and off automatically Controls in detail Lighting Daytime running lamp mode gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position WJ or Mg When the engine is running the low beam headlamps are switched on In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally e Tail and parking lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps For nighttime driving you sh
77. may involve shifting down one or more gears Steering wheel gearshift control one touch gearshifting The steering wheel gearshift control pro vides an alternative method for changing the gears manually and limiting or extend ing the gear range for automatic shifting with the gear selector lever in position D and driving in the automatic program mode C or S For information on using the steering wheel gearshift control in manual pro gram mode M see Manual shift pro gram gt page 165 To avoid overrevving the engine when downshifting with steering wheel gearshift buttons the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s max speed would be exceeded Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Controls in detail Automatic transmission The steering wheel gearshift buttons are located to the left and right of the steering wheel 1 Left button downshift 2 Right button upshift You cannot shift with the steering wheel gearshift buttons when the gear selector lever is in position P
78. mode is deactivated indicator lamp on button not lit or if the outside temperature has fallen below 5 C 41 F Activating gt Press button EM gt page 185 The indicator lamp on the button comes on o The activated charcoal filter should be switched off when windows fog up on the inside or if the passenger compart ment needs to be quickly heated or cooled down The activated charcoal filter should be switched off when windows fog up on the inside or if the passenger compart ment needs to be quickly heated or cooled down Controls in detail Automatic climate control Canada only Air conditioning Warning A N Press and hold button Ej for approx 2 seconds The side windows and or tilt sliding sunroof will return to their previous position You can release button ES once the opening proce The cooling function only operational when the engine is running cools the vehi cle interior down to the selected tempera ture The cooling function also Never operate the side windows and the tilt sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing pro cedure dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior dure has begun The windows and l l In the event that the closing procedure tilt sliding sunroof continue opening thus preventing the windows from fogging causes potential danger the closing of the until they have reached their previous Up side windo
79. off e when the ignition is switched on e after about 30 minutes e if the battery voltage drops Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents The air conditioning for the rear passenger compartment is controlled via the auto matic climate control panel gt page 185 The temperature at the center air vents for the rear passenger compartment Q and is the same as at the dashboard center air vents The air vents for the rear passenger compartment are located in the rear center console Adjusting air distribution gt Push the slide for the left center vent 4 or right center vent to the left right up or down The air flow is directed in the corresponding direction For draft free ventilation push slides 1 and upward T Pa3 00 2093 31 Adjusting air volume 1 Left center air vent 2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for center air vents 3 Right center air vent gt Turn thumbwheel 2 up or down The air volume is increased or decreased Vv Audio system Audio and telephone operation These instructions are intended to help you become familiar with your Mercedes Benz audio system They con tain useful tips and a detailed description of the user functions Warning A N In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an accident the driver should enter system settings with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the system only when road and traf
80. once again in effect The cooling remains switched on Windshield fogged on the outside Keep this setting selected only until the windshield is clear again gt Switch the windshield wipers on gt page 50 If the automatic mode of the automatic cli mate control is switched off gt Turn air distribution control C or to or FM gt page 185 Maximum cooling MAXCOOL If the left and right air distribution controls as well as the airflow volume control are set to BGR gt page 185 and there is a high need for cooling the display MAXCOOL appears This provides the fastest possible cooling of the vehicle interior when side windows and tilt sliding sunroof are closed Controls in detail Automatic climate control Canada only Air recirculation mode Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside e g before driving through a tunnel This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment A Fogged windows impair visibility endanger ing you and others If the windows begin to fog on the inside switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging If interior window fogging persists make sure the air conditioning gt page 185 is activated or press button Keg Warning Activating gt Press button QJ gt page 185 The ind
81. presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following Occurs 1 the same substantial defect or mal function results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven that de fect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times and you have directly notified Mercedes Benz USA LLC in writing of the need for its repair 2 the same substantial defect or mal function of a less serious nature than category 1 has been subject to repair four or more times and you have direct ly notified us in writing of the need for its repair or Introduction Operator s Manual 3 the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different sub stantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days Written notification should be sent to us not a dealer at Mercedes Benz USA LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 Introduction Operator s Manual Maintenance The Maintenance Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals Always have the Maintenance Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your au thorized Mercedes Benz Center for ser vice The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you Roadside Assistance The Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides fac
82. reappears in the multifunction display The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D Shifting into optimal gear range gt Press and hold button Q on the left side of the steering wheel The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration This may involve shifting down one or more gears Manual shift program In addition to the automatic shift program C or S your vehicle is equipped with the manual shift program M In the manual program mode M system controlled automatic gearshifting is switched off and you need to change the gears by manually upshifting or downshift ing using the steering wheel gearshift but tons to the left and right of the steering wheel gt page 163 or the gear selector lever Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Controls in detail Automatic transmission The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the center console pie m a4 1 tee ot C Program mode selector switch M
83. rear outer seats are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and belt force limiters The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases e in frontal or rear end impacts exceeding a preset severity level e ifthe restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly See indicator lamp gt page 60 The ETDs for the front seats will only activate if the respective front seat belt is fastened latch plate properly inserted into buckle The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate with or without the respective seat belt fastened In an impact emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body Belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash A An emergency tensioning device ETD that was activated must be replaced Warning When scrapping the emergency tensioning device our safety instructions must be followed These are available at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not place objects heavier than 20 Ibs 9 kg on the front passenger seat This could cause the front or side impact air bag on the front passenger side and with the seat belt fastened to secure the object the ETD to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system s de ployment threshold Active head restraint The active head restraints are intended to offer the driver and front passenger in c
84. removed or in starter switch position 0 o The system does not deactivate the side impact air bag front side impact air bag and or rear side impact air bag and the emergency tension ing device Self test BabySmart without special child seat installed After turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 the KEXI indicator lamp comes on for approximately 6 seconds and then goes out If the indicator lamp should not come on or is continuously lit the system is not functioning You must see an authorized Mercedes Benz Center before seating any child on the front passenger seat For more information see Practical hints gt page 357 Warning A N The BabySmart air bag deactivation sys tem will ONLY work with a special child seat designed to operate with it It will not work with child seats which are not BabySmart compatible Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat e g pillow since it reduces the effectiveness of the deactivation sys tem The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident instead of protecting the child Follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation of special child seats Warning AN When using a BabySmart compatible child seat on the front passenger seat the passenger front air bag will n
85. seat belts and infant and child restraint systems Is required by law in all 50 states the District of Columbia the U S territories and all Canadian provinces Even where this is not the case all vehicle occupants should have their seat belts fas tened whenever the vehicle is in motion For more information on seat belts see Fastening the seat belt gt page 42 For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children see Children in the vehicle gt page 72 Warning AN Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women Failure to wear and properly fasten and po sition your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your passengers should always wear seat belts If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt Air bags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are prop erly wearing their seat belts Safety and Security
86. selves may also have malfunctioned by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Display malfunction Visit workshop Certain electronic systems are unable to gt relay information to the control system The following systems may have failed Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center e Coolant temperature display e Tachometer e Cruise control display Close the doors Doors open You are attempting to drive with one or gt more doors open Display symbol Display messages USA only At next gas station add 1 0 qt engine oil Canada only At next gas station add 1 0 engine oil Engine oil level stop engine off Engine oil level Reduce oil level Change engine oil Visit workshop Possible cause consequence The engine oil level is too low There is no oil in the engine There is a danger of engine damage You have added too much engine oil There is a risk of damaging the engine or the catalytic converter lt may be that there is water in the engine gt oil Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Addengine oil gt page 300 and check the engine oil level gt page 299 gt Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon as possible gt Turn off the engine gt Addengine oil gt page 300 and check the engine oil level gt page 299 gt Have oil siphoned or drained off Observe all legal requirements with r
87. steering is locked To unlock remove SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert To signal turns while being towed with the hazard warning flasher in use switch on the ignition and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in the usual manner only the selected turn signal will operate Upon canceling the turn signal the hazard warning flasher will operate again Warning VAN With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve hicle Adapt your driving accordingly When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground please note the following With the automatic central locking activated and the SmartKey in starter switch position 2 the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approx 9 mph 15 km h or more Switch off the tow away alarm gt page 90 To prevent the vehicle doors from locking deactivate the automatic central locking gt page 147 Towing of the vehicle should only be done using the properly installed towing eye bolt Never attach tow cable tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis frame or suspension parts If the battery is disconnected or discharged the SmartKey will not turn in the starter switch For more i
88. support The curvature of the drivers seat can be adjusted to help enhance lower back sup port and seating comfort nii Y e P91 10 2827 31 1 Adjustment lever gt Move adjustment lever Q in direction of arrows until you have reached a comfortable seating position Controls in detail Seats Seat heating Both switches for the front seats are locat ed in the center console The red indicator lamps in the switch come on to show heat ing level you have selected FN 1 Seat heating switch 2 Indicator lamps gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 Level off Three indicator lamps on highest level After approximately 5 minutes seat heating is automatically switched to level 2 Two indicator lamps on After approximately 10 minutes seat heating is automatically switched to level 1 One indicator lamp on lowest level After approximately 20 minutes seat heating is automatically switched off No indicator lamp on Switching on seat heating gt Press switch Q once Three red indicator lamps 2 in the switch come on gt Continue pressing switch until desired seat heating level is reached Switching off seat heating gt Press switch 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps 2 go out i If one or more of the indicator lamps 2 on the seat heating switch are flashing there is insufficient volt age due to too many electrical consum
89. take extra care while driving Emergency brake maneuver gt Keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal Warning AN When the ABS is malfunctioning the BAS and the ESP are also switched off When the ABS is malfunctioning the wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability and extending the brak ing distance Safety and Security Driving safety systems Warning VAN The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction af forded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe atten tive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeop ardize the user s safety or the safety of others For more information see the Practical hints section gt page 350 and gt page 360 Safety and Security Driving safety systems BAS The Brake Assist System BAS operates in emergency situations If you apply the brakes very quickly the BAS automatically provides full brake boost thereby poten tially reducing the braking distance gt Apply continuous full braking pressure until the
90. temperature wait 5 minutes before repeating check procedure gt If engine is not at operating tempera ture yet wait 30 minutes before repeating check procedure If you see the message Engine oil level Not when engine on gt Turn off the engine gt Ifthe engine is at operating tempera ture wait 5 minutes before checking oil gt Ifthe engine is not at operating temper ature yet you must wait 30 minutes before checking oil If there is excess engine oil with the engine at operating temperature the following message will appear Engine oil level Reduce oil level gt Have excess oil siphoned or drained off Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty For more information on messages in the multifunction display concerning engine oil see the Practical hints section gt page 371 and gt page 372 Adding engine oil Only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicles For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly require
91. the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system or if the coolant temperature gauge indi cates that the coolant is overheated Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if coolant temperature is above 158 F 70 C Allow engine to cool down before removing cap The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure Using a rag slowly open the cap approximately ee turn to relieve excess pressure If opened immediately scald ing hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts The coolant expansion tank is located on the passenger side of the engine compart ment 1 Coolant expansion tank 2 Cap gt Using a rag turn cap slowly approx imately one half counterclockwise to release any excess pressure gt Continue turning the cap counterclock wise and remove it The coolant level is correct if the level e for cold coolant reaches the black top part of the reservoir e for warm coolant is approx 0 6 in 1 5 cm higher gt Add coolant as required gt Replace and tighten cap For more information on coolant see Coolants gt page 439 Battery Your vehicle s battery is located in the engine compartment on the right hand side gt page 411 The battery should always be suf
92. the backrest gt Remove cover 1 from anchorage ring G gt Guide tether strap between head restraint and top of seat back Head restraint must be installed if removable and positioned such that the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of seat back Make sure the tether strap is not twisted PO1 40 2376 31 2 Hook 3 Anchorage ring gt Securely fasten hook 2 which is part of the tether strap to anchorage ring Once the top tether anchorage hook is attached the child restraint itself can be secured Tighten the top tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions For safety make sure the hook has attached to the ring beyond the safety catch as illustrated gt Reinstall cover Q after removing the tether strap Child seat anchors LATCH type This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren type anchors at each of the outer rear seats for the installation of a LATCH type child seat with the matching mounting fittings Warning A N Children too big for a toddler restraint must ride in seats using regular seat belts Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder not face or neck A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children over 41 Ibs until they reach a height where a lap shoulder belt fits properly without a booster Install child seat
93. the headlamps driver s door opened and the SmartKey removed from the starter switch Taillamp left The left tail lamp is malfunctioning gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible SUSE Wier ol A substitute bulb is being used Taillamp right The right tail lamp is malfunctioning gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Substit bulb on A substitute bulb is being used Display symbol 10 oe I Display message Turn signal left front Tein Sic EE ON Turn signal left mirror Turn signal right mirror Turn signal left rear SUS eeu omer Turn signal right rear Wo rir oio on Possible cause consequence The left front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning The left turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working The right turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning A substitute bulb is being used The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning A substitute bulb is being used Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz
94. the shoulder portion of the belt across the top of your shoulder and the lap portion across your hips Push latch plate into buckle 3 until it engages If necessary tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up 1 Latch plate 2 Release button 3 Buckle belt is properly positioned on the body Getting started Driving Belt outlet height adjustment 1 Release button gt Press release button Q and move the seat belt height adjuster upward or downward Proper use of seat belts Do not twist the seat belt when fasten ing Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder it should not touch the neck Never pass the shoulder portion of the belt under your arm For this purpose you can adjust the height of the belt outlet Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips over hip joint and not across the abdomen Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position Never use a Seat belt for more than one person at a time Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same time When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats always follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions Check your seat belt during travel to make sure that it is properly posi tioned Make sure that the seat belt is always fitted snug
95. their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door or the rear side trim panel where the front side im pact air bag and or the rear side impact air bag inflates This could result in se rious injuries or death should the air bag be triggered Always sit nearly upright properly use the seat belts and appropri ate size infant or child restraint system Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat except in a Mercedes Benz authorized BabySmart compatible child seat which operates with the BabySmart system installed in the vehicle to deacti vate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed Otherwise they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash If this happens serious or fa tal injury will result Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants If you sell your vehicle it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information Be sure to give the buyer this Operators Manual Warning A N Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat Should you choose to place a child 12 years old or under in the front passenger seat of your vehicle you must properly use a BabySmart child restraint which will turn off the passenger front air bag BabySmart will not however turn off any side impact air bag front side impact air bag and or rear side impact
96. tire only after the wheel is properly mounted Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric pump gt page 408 before lowering the vehicle P40 10 3298 31 1 Flap 2 On off switch Warning A 3 Electrical plug 4 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent Observe instructions on air pump label Screw Union nut H gt Do not lower the vehicle before inflating the collapsible tire Otherwise the rim may be damaged gt gt Take the electric air pump out of the trunk gt page 381 gt Open flap on electric air pump Pull out electrical plug 3 and air hose with pressure gauge 4 Remove the valve cap from the collapsible tire valve Screw union nut onto the collaps ible tire valve gt Insert electrical plug into vehicle cigarette lighter socket gt page 263 The cigarette lighter gt page 262 is not designed for use with the electric air pump Use the power outlet in the rear passenger compartment gt page 263 for electric air pump operation Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 Press I on electric air pump switch 2 The electric air pump should now switch on and inflate the collapsible tire gt Inflate the tire to approximately 51 psi 3 5 bar This takes about 5 minutes for the col lapsible tire Air hose and union nut G can become hot during infla tion Exercise proper caution to avoid burning yourself wh
97. tires are rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver Such notices are available from your tire dealer or from any authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A N If you use your spare tire when winter tires are fitted on the other wheels be aware that the difference in tire characteristics may very well impair turning stability and that overall driving stability may be reduced Adapt your driving style accordingly Have the spare tire replaced with a winter tire at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Block heater Canada only The engine is equipped with a block heater The electrical cable may be installed at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Snow chains Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow When driving with snow chains you may wish to deactivate the ESP gt page 84 before setting the vehicle in motion This will improve the vehicle s traction Please observe the following guidelines when using snow chains e Use of snow chains is not permissible with all wheel tire combinations e Snow chains should only be used on the rear wheels Follow the manufac turer s mounting instructions Operation Winter driving Only use snow chains that are approved by Mercedes Benz Yo
98. trunk is the preferred place to carry objects Driving abroad Abroad there is an extensive Mercedes Benz service network at your disposal If you plan to drive into areas which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes Benz Center directory you should request pertinent information from an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Control and operation of radio transmitters COMAND radio and telephone Warning A N Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely Only operate the COMAND Cockpit Management and Data System radio or telephone if road weather and traffic conditions permit Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Observe all legal requirements Telephones and two way radios Warning A N Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system possibly resulting in an accident and personal injury Radio transmitters such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle Refer to the radio transmitter operation instru
99. varies widely Specified tire inflation pressures must be maintained This applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high loads e g high speeds heavy loads high ambient temper atures A Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You may lose control of the vehicle Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build up and possibly a fire Warning Hydroplaning Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road hydroplaning may occur even at low speeds and with new tires Reduce vehicle speed avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain Tire traction The safe speed on a wet snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point A If ice has formed on the road tire traction will be substantially reduced Under such weather conditions drive steer and brake with extreme caution Warning Operation Driving instructions Mercedes Benz recommends winter tires gt page 336 with a minimum tread depth of approximately ve in 4 mm on all four wheels for the winter season to ensure normal balanced handling characteristics On packed snow they can reduce your stopping distance compared to summer tires Stopping dis
100. vehicle sound and communications systems including the radio and the navigation system as well as other optional equipment CD changer telephone etc Control system The control system is used to call up vehicle information and to change component settings Information and messages appear in the multifunction display The driver uses the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to navigate through the system and to adjust settings Cruise control Driving convenience system that automatically maintains the vehicle speed set by the driver Curb weight gt page 332 DOT Department of Transportation gt page 332 Engine number The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the cylinder block to uniquely identify each engine produced Engine oil viscosity Measurement for the inner friction viscosity of the oil at different temper atures The higher the temperature an oil can tolerate without becoming thin or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without becoming viscous the better the viscosity ESP Electronic Stability Program Improves vehicle handling and directional stability ETD Emergency Tensioning Device Device which deploys in certain frontal and rear collisions exceeding the system s threshold to tighten the seat belts gt SRS FSS Canada vehicles Flexible Service System Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the
101. wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 Ja times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Operation Tires and wheels Traction Temperature The traction grades from highest to low The temperature grades are A the high manning A est are AA A B and C Those grades rep est B and C representing the tire s resis EERE resent the tire s ability to stop on wet tance to the generation of heat and its lished for a tire that is properly inflated and pavement as measured under controlled ability to dissipate heat when tested under not overloaded Excessive speed underin conditions on specified government test controlled conditions ona specified indoor flation or excessive loading either sepa surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire laboratory test wheel Sustained high tem rately or in combination can cause marked C may have poor traction perfor perature can cause the material of the tire excessive heat build up and possible tire mance to degenerate and reduce tire life and ex failure cessive temperature can lead to sudden AN tire failure
102. will be mailed to you Technical data Identification labels 1 Certification label includes Paintwork code 2AE r6 3 Vacuum line routing diagram label 4 Engine number engraved on engine VIN visible lower edge of windshield 6 Emission control information label includes both federal and California certification exhaust emission standards When ordering parts please specify vehicle identification and engine num bers Technical data Layout of poly V belt drive Y Layout of poly V belt drive 0 OX 6 amp 4 P13 22 2040 31 C 55 AMG Q Automatic belt tensioner 2 Power steering pump 3 Air conditioning compressor 4 Crankshaft Coolant pump 6 Generator alternator 7 Idler pulley KO Technical data Engine Model Engine Mode of operation No of cylinders Bore Stroke Total piston displacement Compression ratio Output acc to SAE J 1349 Maximum torque acc to SAE J 1349 Maximum engine speed Firing order Poly V belt C 55 AMG 203 076 113 4 stroke engine gasoline injection 8 3 82 in 97 00 mm 3 60 in 92 00 mm 331 8 cu in 5439 cm 14 1 362 hp 5750 rom 270 kW 5750 rpm 376 b ft 4000 rpm 510 Nm 4000 rpm 6700 rpm 1 5 4 2 6 3 7 8 2380 mm The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies
103. with e Program mode 161 Seat belt telltale 67 Electronic Stability 84 e Status indicator outside 124 399 Program ESP 354 temperature digital 139 EJ High beam headlamp 49 warning lamp speedometer indicator lamp 118 Brake warning lamp 46 54 e Digital clock 125 6 Fuel gauge with USA only 351 WE Right turn signal 49 Fuel reserve warning lamp 354 Brake warning lamp 46 54 indicator lamp BW The arrow indicates Canada only a Tachometer with 124 that the fuel filler cap Low beam headlamp 48 Antilock Brake 82 is on the rear indicator lamp 114 System ABS 350 right hand side D eM Left turn signal 49 indicator lamp Coolant temperature gauge 123 indicator lamp RE Engine malfunction 352 Button for 122 3 Multifunction display 125 indicator lamp 353 e Resetting trip odometer 123 with USA only l l l l l e Resetting all settings 135 e Trip odometer 123 Ew Engine malfunction 352 ao salts a indicator lamp 353 A A bea e Main odometer 125 aaoi p iumimnaton e Gear selector lever 45 position 125 SRS Supplemental 60 157 Restraint System 356 SRS indicator lamp At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Item Page Item Page Multifunction displa 125 Menu systems O play y Operating control system 126 Press button Telephone for next menu Press button for previous menu to take a call Moving within a menu to dial a call Press button to end a call Wag for next display to reject an incoming
104. your abdomen it could cause serious injuries in a crash Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another per son or other objects Belts should not be worn twisted In a crash you wouldn t have the full width of the belt to manage impact forces The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries Pregnant women should also use a lap shoulder belt The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pres sure on the abdomen Never place your feet on the instrument panel dashboard or on the seat Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat Depending on vehicle production date your vehicle is equipped with either a seat belt reminder system or an enhanced seat belt reminder system as follows Seat belt reminder system When the engine is started the seat belt telltale illuminates for a maximum of 6 seconds and a warning chime sounds to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts For more information on the seat belt telltale Ham see Practical hints gt page 355 Safety and Security Occupant safety Enhanced seat belt reminder system When the engine is started the seat belt telltale illuminates for a maximum of 6 seconds and a warning chime sounds to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts If after these 6 seconds the driver s or the fr
105. 10 Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles 11 Maintenance ccceceecececececeececs 12 Roadside Assistance eeeeee 12 Change of address or ownership 12 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or CANA A sszecedassteceantcansctosessens 13 Where to find it ceeecccsessececeeeeeeees 14 MDO arrr e EA 15 Operating safety ceeccccessssceeeeeeeeees 16 Proper use of the vehicle 16 Problems with your vehicle 6 17 Reporting safety defects cccce 18 Reporting Safety Defects 18 Vehicle data recording ccsseccceeees 19 Information regarding electronic recording CEVICES scccceeeeeees 19 At a glance 0 cece ceecccceeeeeceeeeeees 21 COCR e A 22 Instrument cluster sseseseseessseeesseeeese 24 Multifunction steering wheel 26 Center console ssccccsessccsesseceeees 27 Upper palt tecrestoueacteurmeaweaseaaevenrs tees 27 Lower part ssssssesssesseserssessesseessess 28 Overhead control panel ccee eee 29 Door control panel cccccceeesceeeeeees 30 Getting started cc cccccceeeeeeees 31 WIAIO CII S sirsiran ES 32 Unlocking with the SmartKey 32 Starter switch positions 0 33 AJUSTE arenasi 35 E EE E N E A E 35 Steering WhEEel ccccsssccreseeeeeees 38
106. 138 mode Select language 138 Select display speed display or 139 outside temperature for status indicator Select speedometer display mode gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Instr Cl submenu gt Press button JM or Keg repeatedly until the message Disp Unit Speed odo appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Disp UniIt Speed odoa Km Miles D P54 32 31B84 31 gt Press button or E to set speedometer unit to Km or Miles Select language gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Instr Cl submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until the message Language appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Language H Deutsch English frangais D P54 32 3420 31 Press button or E to select the language to be used for the multifunction display messages Available languages e German Deutsch e English English e French francais e Italian italiano e Spanish Espa ol e Dutch Nederlands e Danish Dansk e Swedish Svenska e Portuguese Portugu s e Turkish Turkce Select display digital speedometer or outside temperature for status indicator gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Instr Cl submenu gt Press button EAN or Ke repeatedly until the message Status line display appears i
107. 197 Button and soft key operation 200 CD changer with MP3 216 CD operation 214 Operating and display elements 198 Operating audio system 200 Operating safety 197 Radio operation 205 Telephone operation 223 Auto dimming mirror 169 Automatic central locking Activating deactivating Control system 147 Automatic climate control Canada only 184 Control panel 185 Defrosting front 190 Rear window defroster 173 Automatic headlamp mode 115 Automatic locking when driving 103 Automatic shift program Program mode selector switch Automatic transmission 161 Automatic time change Standard time Daylight Saving time 142 Automatic transmission 155 Accelerator position 158 Automatic shift program 161 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 168 Fluid level ATF 301 Gear ranges 160 Gear selector lever 155 Gear shifting malfunctions 168 Kickdown 158 Kickdown manual shift program 167 Manual shift program 165 Manual shifting 162 One touch gearshifting Gear selector lever 162 One touch gearshifting Steering wheel gearshift control 163 Program mode selector switch 161 Program mode selector switch manual shift program 165 Starting engine 46 B BabySmartIM Air bag deactivation system 75 443 Compatible child seats 75 443 Self test 76 Backrest Rear seat folding 252 Seat power 36 Backup lamps Messages in display 374 Replacing bulbs 396 Bar 331 BAS 84 443 Batteries SmartKey Changing 393 Checkin
108. 2035843871 Order No 6515 0187 13 Part No 203 584 38 71 USA Edition D 2006 Operator s Manual C Class AMG Operator s Manual C Class AMG A Mercedes Benz C55 AMG Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes Benz Your selection of our product is a demon stration of your trust in our company name Furthermore it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service Your Mercedes Benz represents the ef forts of many skilled engineers and crafts men To help assure your driving pleasure and also the safety of you and your passen gers we ask you to make a small invest ment of time e Please read this manual carefully then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference e Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual They are de signed to acquaint you with the opera tion of your Mercedes Benz e Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and oc cupants We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe pleasurable driving Mercedes Benz USA LLC A DaimlerChrysler Company INtrOCUCTION cccecescecescscescecees 9 Product information cc cccecesceceeees 9 Operators Manual ccccseseeceeeeees 10 Service and warranty information
109. 404 Mounting the spare wheel 404 DAUG Y ccrann pran r 411 Disconnecting the battery 412 Removing the battery 412 Charging and reinstalling the DAE ana tueseess 413 Reconnecting the battery 413 JUNG STALLING vasacnscrnsestieieswornesensdnsvanenes 415 Towing the vehicle sscccccseeeeees 417 Installing towing eye bolt 419 SS Setesaae erated cece ee eeceebo oss beekemeeaceen 420 Aids for replacing fuses 420 Main fuse box in passenger compartment ceeccsecceeeeeeeeeees 421 Fuse box in engine compartment 421 Fuse Dox iN trunk cseseccceeeees 422 Technical data ccccccceeeeeeees 423 Parts service sc vessiententicsiortnbnieaseneratens 424 Warranty coverage cseccccesseceeeeees 425 Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet 0008 425 Identification labels cccceceeeeees 426 Layout of poly V belt drive 427 ENON eaea 428 Rims and Tires ccceeseccceeseeceneeees 429 SAME size tires eeeeeeceeeeseeeees 431 Mixed size tires ccccseeeeeeeeee 432 Spare wheel collapsible tire 433 Electrical SYSteEM cccccsesseceneeees 434 Main dimensions and weights 435 Main dimensions cseeeceeeeee 435 Wela MIS csenodesicinnncteqnaaivenearnsaecses 435 Fuels coolants lubricants etc
110. 5 until the de sired temperature appears in the con trol panel display gt page 185 The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature If you decrease the temperature for one side of the vehicle to the lowest ad justable value then you will see the message LO in the display This also de creases the temperature for the other side of the vehicle at the same time Adjusting air distribution Use air distribution controls 4 and gt page 185 to separately adjust the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment The following symbols are found on the controls Symbol Function Directs air through the center side and rear passenger compartment air vents t Directs air to the windshield and the side defroster vents Ti Directs air into the entire vehicle interior Te Directs air to the footwells Controls in detail Automatic climate control Canada only Turn air distribution control C or gt page 185 to the desired symbol The indicator lamp on the button Mg gt page 185 goes out The automatic air distribution is switched off The air distribution is controlled according to the selected control setting You can also turn the air distribution control to a position between two sym bols Opening center and side air vents gt Turn thumbwheels 3 O and gt page 184 upward The center air vents G
111. 56 Roadside Assistance 12 268 Towing the vehicle 417 Emission control 291 Information label 426 System warranties 10 Engine Belt layout 427 Block heater Canada only 337 Brake in recommendations 282 Cleaning 343 Compartment 297 Malfunction indicator lamp 25 352 Maximum engine speed 428 Number 426 Starting 46 Technical data 428 Turning 56 Engine coolant see coolant Engine number 444 Engine oil 298 437 Adding 300 Additives 437 Changing 436 Checking level 299 Consumption 298 Display messages 299 Fillerneck 301 Messages indisplay 299 371 372 Recommended engine and oil filter 371 Viscosity 444 ESP 84 444 Messages indisplay 361 362 Warning lamp 25 354 ETD 70 445 Safety guidelines 64 Exterior lamp switch 48 114 Exterior rear view mirrors 40 Parking position 170 F Fahrenheit see Temperature display mode 137 Filler neck Engine oil 301 First aid kit 380 Flat tire 404 Jacking up the vehicle 405 Lowering the vehicle 410 Mounting the spare wheel Preparing the vehicle 404 Spare wheel with collapsible tire Flexible Service System see FSS 404 383 Fluids Automatic transmission fluid 301 436 Brake fluid 295 437 Capacities 436 Engine coolant 295 439 Engine oil 298 437 Power steering fluid 436 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 304 442 Fog lamps 117 118 Message in display 374 376 Replacing bulbs 395 396 Front air bags 65 Front lamps see Headlamps Front passenger fr
112. 96 Standing water Driving through 289 252 Starter switch 23 33 Positions 33 Starting difficulties Engine 46 Steering column 38 Easy entry exit feature 39 Steering gear oil Message in display 378 Steering wheel 38 Buttons 26 Cleaning 346 Electrical adjustment 38 Stolen vehicle Recovery services Storage compartments Armrest 257 Cup holder 258 Glove box 256 Parcel net in front passenger footwell 258 Storing memory function Positions into memory 112 Storing tires 307 Submenus see Control system submenus Substitute lamps Bulbs 394 Summer opening feature 241 272 Sun visors 171 Sunshade 172 Supplemental Restraint System see SRS Symbols used in this operator s manual 15 T Tachometer 25 124 Overspeed range 124 Tail lamps Cleaning 344 Messages in display 376 Replacing bulbs 396 400 Tar stains 342 Technical data Air conditioning refrigerant 437 Brake fluid 437 Coolant 436 439 Electrical system 434 Engine 428 Engine oil additives 437 Engine oils 437 Fuel requirements 439 Fuels 436 Fuels coolants lubricants etc 436 Gasoline additives 438 Lubricants 436 Premium unleaded gasoline 438 Rims and tires 429 Weights 435 Windshield washer 436 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 436 442 Tele Aid 264 265 271 Emergency calls 266 Hands free microphone 29 Information 270 Initiating an emergency call manually 267 Message in display 379 Remote door unlock 272 Roadside Assistance 268 SOS button
113. 9PS ADDITIONAL FORINTON P40 00 2062 31 1 Load limit information on the Tire and Loading Information placard Operation Tires and wheels The placard showing the load limit informa tion is located on the driver s door B pillar If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and Loading Information placard Example A locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX Ibs on this placard The combined weight of all occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue load if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced in that statement Placard Example B VEHICLE TIRE INFORMATION EHICLE CAPACITY WEIGHT Al KG ME LBS z VEHICLE SEATING CAPACITY COLD TIRE PRESSURE 1 Load limit information on the Vehicle Tire Information placard The placard showing the load limit informa tion is located on the driver s door B pillar If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle Tire Information placard Example B locate the heading Vehicle Capacity Weight on this placard The combined weight of all occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue if applicable should never exceed the weight listed next to vehicle capacity weight Seating capacity The seating capacity gives you important information on the number of occupants that can be in the vehicle Observe front and rear seating capacity Your vehicle is equipped with either placa
114. B FOUND appears in the display If this happens switch back to standard radio mode Scan search e Starting scan search gt Press SC soft key SC will appear in the display The radio briefly tunes in all receivable weather band stations e Ending scan search gt Press SC soft key or BER or EJ The weather band station last played will be selected and SC disappears from the display Controls in detail Audio system Introduction to satellite radio USA only SIRIUS satellite radio provides 100 chan nels of digital quality radio among others music sports news and entertainment free of commercials SIRIUS satellite radio uses a fleet of high power satellites to broadcast 24 hours per day coast to coast in the contiguous U S This diverse satellite delivered program ming is available for a monthly subscrip tion fee For more information and service availability call the SIRIUS Service Center gt page 210 or contact www siriusradio com Controls in detail Audio system Additional satellite radio equipment and a subscription to a satellite radio service provider are required for the satellite radio operation described here Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for details and availability for your vehicle o Satellite radio service may be unavail able or interrupted from time to time for a variety of reasons such as envi ronmental or topographic conditions an
115. Certification label also tells you about the front and rear axle weight capacity called the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for either the front axle or rear axle Tire and Loading Information Warning A N Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or Following is a discussion on how to work brake failure with the information contained on the two placards with regards to loading your vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with either the Tire and Loading Information placard Example A or the Vehicle Tire Information placard Example B Operation Tires and wheels Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only Load lim it data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illus trations below Refer to placard on ve hicle for actual data specific to your vehicle Placard Example A TIRE AND LOAQING INFORMATION _SEATINGCAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXN kg or XXX Ibs fe sce corse ios MANUAL FOR REAR P195 70RI4 200KPA 2
116. Describe the nature of the need for assistance The Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Mercedes Benz technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center For services such as labor and or towing charges may ap ply Refer to the Roadside Assistance Man ual for more information These programs are only available in the USA e Sign and Drive services Services such as jump start a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable The indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button remains illumi nated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self check after switching on the igni tion together with the SOS button and the Information button B See system self check gt page 266 if the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds Controls in detail Useful features If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assis tance call e g the relevant cellular phone network was not available The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the button on the multifunction steering wheel or the END Button on the audi
117. For more information on tire load rating i l gt page 323 pressure more likely to fail from being overheated For information on calculating total and amp Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride com fort wear unevenly increase stopping dis tance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road de bris potholes etc cargo load capacities gt page 311 For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration This is the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure for the tire Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards U S vehicles Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance 1 Treadwear 2 Traction 3 Temperature resistance For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration Quality grades can be found where appli cable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear Traction Temperature 200 AA A All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Operation Tires and wheels Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rat ing based on the
118. H Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those express ly required for the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehi cles or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehi cles will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Please follow Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehi cles recommendations for scheduled oil changes Failure to do so will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Engine oil additives Do not blend oil additives with engine oil They may damage the engine Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant R 134a HFC refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning system Never use R 12 CFC or mineral based lubricating oil Otherwise damage to the system will occur Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Brake fluid During vehicle operation the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere A Under extremely strenuous operating condi tions this moisture content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system thus re ducing the system s efficiency Warning
119. Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Mercedes Benz USA LLC If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Mercedes Benz USA LLC To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov Introduction Vehicle data recording Y Vehicle data recording Information regarding electronic recording devices Including notice pursuant to California Code 9951 Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and if equipped with the Tele Aid system may transmit some data in certain accidents This information helps for example to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency for use in dis
120. Mercedes Benz approved products of equal specification see Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level To provide important corrosion protection the solution must be at least 45 anticorrosion antifreeze equivalent to freeze protection to approx 22 F 30 C If you use a solution that is more than 55 anticorrosion antifreeze freeze protection to approx 49 F 45 C the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution Therefore do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion antifreeze If the coolant level is low water and MB 325 0 anticorrosion antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level have cooling system checked for signs of leakage Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instructions The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water If you are not sure about the water quality consult an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Anticorrosion antifreeze Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifi cally formulated to protect the aluminum parts Failure to use such anticorrosion anti freeze coolant will result in a significantly
121. N or R The last selected program mode C or S is switched on when the engine is restarted in the automatic program mode Controls in detail Automatic transmission The following instructions describe opera tion of the steering wheel gearshift control when driving in the automatic program mode C or S For instructions on operating the steering wheel gearshift control and gear selector lever in the manual program mode M see Manual shift program gt page 165 Downshifting A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control Warning gt Briefly press button 4 on the left side of the steering wheel The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission gt page 160 when you are driving in the automatic program mode C or S Upshifting gt Briefly press button 2 on the right side of the steering wheel The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmission when you are driving in the automatic program mode C or S Canceling gear range limit gt Press and hold button on the right side of the steering wheel until D
122. Occupant safety Warning VAN Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck That could cause serious or even fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body Warning A N Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning A N Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes Benz Do not make any modifications to the seat belts This can lead to unintended activation of the ETDs or to failure Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning AN USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY e Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times because seat belts
123. Opening closing in an emergency 389 Stopping 244 Synchronizing 244 Power tilt sliding sunroof Messages in display 379 Opening closing 242 Opening closing SmartKey 241 Power train 446 Power washer 342 Power windows 238 Cleaning 345 Opening closing 238 Rear door window Blocking operation 80 Stopping 240 synchronizing 240 Practical hints 350 Premium unleaded gasoline 438 Problems While driving 52 With vehicle 17 Product information 9 Production options weight 333 Program mode 125 Program mode selector switch 447 Automatic shift program automatic transmission 161 Manual shift program automatic transmission 165 PSI 333 Push starting 415 Push start see Tow start R Radio Operation 200 205 Selecting stations Control system 131 Radio transmitters 290 Range distance to empty 151 Reading lamp 120 Rear bench seat foldable 252 Rear door window Blocking operation 80 Rear fog lamp see Fog lamps Rear lamps see Tail lamps Rear outer seats Adjusting head restraint height 107 Rear passenger compartment Adjustable airvents 183 196 Rear seat ashtray see Ashtray Rear seat head restraints see Head restraints Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Rear window defroster 173 Rear window sunshade 172 Recommended tire inflation pressure 333 Recovery services Stolen vehicle Tele Aid 272 Refrigerant Air conditioning 437 Refueling 293 Regular checks 294 Remote control SmartKey 94 Remote door unlock Tele Aid 272 Repl
124. Page Activate easy entry exit feature 148 Set parking position for exterior 149 rear view mirror Activate easy entry exit feature Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy entry exit feature gt page 39 Warning A N You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy entry exit feature is activated To cancel steering wheel movement do one of the following e Move steering column stalk gt page 38 e Press memory position switch gt page 112 Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could open the driver s door and unintentionally activate the easy entry exit feature which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Convenience submenu Press button EAN or Ref repeatedly until the message Easy entry feature appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Fasy entry feature D r Po4 32 3417 31 gt Press button or E to switch the easy entry feature On or Off Set parking position for exterior rear view mirror Use the Mirror set parking aid function to select whether the passenger side exterior rear view mirror should be turned downward during parking maneuvers when reverse gear R is engaged For additional information see Activating exter
125. Press button A or ed repeatedly until the message Int light delay off appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Int light delay off D Off a P54 32 3418 31 Controls in detail Control system gt Press button or E to switch the delayed shut off feature Off or On Vehicle submenu Access the Vehicle submenu via the Settings menu Use the Vehicle submenu to make general vehicle settings The following function is available Function Page Set automatic locking 147 Set automatic locking Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking With the automatic central locking system activated the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h gt Move the selection marker with button or MRM to the Vehicle submenu gt gt Controls in detail Control system gt gt Press button BAN or eg repeatedly until the message Automatic door Ik appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Automatic door Ik D On Off P54 92 2379 31 gt Press button or E to switch the automatic central locking On or Off Convenience submenu Access the Convenience submenu via the Settings menu Use the Convenience submenu to change the settings for a number of convenience features The following functions are available Function
126. Safety and Security Driving safety systems Because of the ESP s automatic operation the engine must be turned off SmartKey in starter switch position O or 1 when e the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer e the vehicle is being towed with the front axle raised Active braking action through the ESP may otherwise seriously damage the brake system For more information see the Practical hints section gt page 354 and gt page 361 Safety and Security Driving safety systems Switching off the ESP AN Warning The ESP should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circum stances described below Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in stan dard driving maneuvers Do not switch off the ESP when a Minis pare wheel or a collapsible tire is mounted To improve the vehicle s traction turn off the ESP in driving situations where it would be advantageous to have the drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as e when driving with snow chains e in deep snow e in sand or gravel Turn on the ESP immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore When you switch off the ESP the ESP does not stabilize the vehicle the engine output is not limited which allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip the traction control will st
127. Tex upholstery Cleaning and care of 347 Mechanical key 386 Memory function see Steering wheel Menus see Control system Microphone Hands free 29 Mirrors Adjusting 40 Auto dimming 169 Exterior rear view mirror 40 Exterior rear view mirror Parking position 113 149 170 Interior rear view mirror 40 MON 446 Motor Octane Number see MON Multifunction display 125 446 Changing settings see Control system menus and Control system sub menus Multifunction display messages ABS 360 Brake fluid 366 Brake lamps 374 Brake pads 366 Coolant 367 368 369 Cruise control 370 Display 370 Door 370 Engine coolant 367 368 369 Engine oil 371 372 ESP 361 362 Foglamps 374 376 Fuel cap 353 373 Headlamps 375 376 Hood 373 Key SmartKey 373 Lamps exterior 374 377 Parking brake 366 Parking lamp 376 Seat belt system 378 SRS 363 Steering gear oil 378 Tele Aid 379 Telephone 379 Tilt sliding sunroof 379 Trunk 379 Turn signals 377 Windshield washer fluid 379 Multifunction steering wheel 26 126 446 Button operation 126 N Navigation system 134 See separate COMAND operating instructions Net parcel 258 Neutral gear position Automatic transmission 155 New vehicle break in 282 Night security illumination 117 Setting 146 Normal occupant weight 333 Number vehicle identification VIN 426 O Occupant distribution 333 Occupant safety 60 Air bags 61 Children and air bags 62 Children in the vehicle 72 F
128. The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response e automatic and manual emergency e roadside assistance e information The Tele Aid system is operational provid ing that the vehicle s battery is charged properly connected not damaged and cel lular and GPS coverage is available The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted when using the volume control on the audio system or COMAND System or on the multifunction steering wheel To raise turn the rotary volume control on au dio system or COMAND System clock wise or press button on the multifunction steering wheel To lower turn the rotary volume control on audio system or COMAND System control counterclockwise or press button Jj on the multifunction steering wheel gt To activate press the SOS button the Roadside Assistance button or the Information button B depend ing on the type of response required Controls in detail Useful features The SOS button is located in the over head control panel gt page 267 The Roadside Assistance button and the Information button are located in the armrest storage com partment gt page 257 The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS Global Positioning System satel lites for vehicle location If either of these signals are unavailable the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs assistance must be sum moned by other means Cont
129. The sound settings for bass and treble are returned to their center level and the volume is set to a predefined level Vehicles with sound system The sound setting is reset depending on the sound source activated e Radio mode STANDARD e CD AUX mode SURROUND e Telephone SPEECH The radio switches back to the standard radio menu 4 seconds after the last soft key is pressed Adjusting volume distribution Call up fader and balance functions by pressing the BEJ button Fader gt Press REJ button repeatedly until FADER appears in the display Controls in detail Audio system or P 2 60 4470 31 Press www or a soft key The volume is distributed accordingly between the front and rear of the vehicle Press RES soft key briefly The fader is reset to its center level The radio switches back to the standard radio menu 8 seconds after the last soft key is pressed Controls in detail Audio system Adjusting balance gt Press RJ button repeatedly until BALANCE appears in the display P82 60 4453 31 gt Press lt 2 or gt gt gt soft key The volume is distributed between the left and right sides of the vehicle or gt Press RES soft key briefly The balance is reset to its center level The radio switches back to the standard radio menu 8 seconds after the last button is pressed Returning volume distribution to Telephone muting factory settings If your vehicle eq
130. a mental moldings If the vehicle is very dirty prewash it be fore running it through the automatic car wash Operation Vehicle care kA Due to the width of the vehicle fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to run ning the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors Make sure that the windshield wiper switch is set to O gt page 50 Other wise the rain sensor could activate and cause the wipers to move unintention ally This may lead to vehicle damage After running the vehicle through an au tomatic car wash wipe any wax off of the windshield gt page 345 This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by residual wax on the windshield When leaving the car wash make sure that the mirrors are folded out Other wise they may vibrate Ornamental moldings For regular cleaning and care of ornamen tal moldings use a damp cloth Do not use chrome cleaner on orna mental moldings Although ornamental moldings may have chrome appear ance they could be made of anodized aluminum that will be damaged when cleaned with chrome cleaner Instead use a damp cloth to clean those orna mental moldings For very dirty ornamental moldings of which you are sure are chrome plated use a chrome cleaner If in doubt whether an ornamental molding is chrome plated contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Headlamps tail lamps side marker
131. ach tire Run Flat Indicator Canada only While the vehicle is being driven the Run Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each wheel s rota tional speed This allows the system to de tect a significant loss of pressure in a tire If a wheel s rotational speed changes due to falling tire inflation pressure you will see a corresponding warning message in the multifunction display The Run Flat Indicator may function in a restricted manner or with a delay if e snow chains are mounted to the vehicle e winter road conditions prevail in presence of ice and snow e you are driving on a loose surface e g sand or gravel e you are driving in a very sporty manner involving rapid acceleration or high speeds in Curves Warning A N When the multifunction display shows the message Tire pressure Check tires one or more of your tires is significantly un der inflated You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper tire inflation pressure as indicated on the vehicle s tire information placard Driving on a significantly under in flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Each tire including the spare should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended tire infla tion pressure
132. acing bulbs Additional turn signallamps 400 Backup lamp 401 Brake lamp 401 Foglamps 401 Headlamps 395 397 399 High beam headlamps 395 397 License plate lamps 401 Low beam headlamps 397 Parking lamps 398 400 401 Rearlamps 396 Side marker lamps 400 401 Standing lamps 398 400 401 Taillamps 401 Turn signallamps 398 400 401 Reporting safety defects 18 Research Octane Number see RON Reset button In the instrument cluster 122 136 Reset tool Location 391 Residual heat utilization 195 Residual ventilation 195 Restraint system see Children in the vehicle see Infant and child restraint systems see SRS Restraint system see Infant and child re straint systems Reverse gear position Automatic transmission 45 Rims 333 429 Roadside Assistance 12 RON 447 Roof rack 248 Rubber parts Cleaning 346 Run Flat Indicator Canada only 318 S Safety Driving safety systems 82 Occupant 60 Reporting defects 18 Safety belts see Seat belts Satellite radio 209 Seat belt force limiter 70 Seat belts 67 Children in the vehicle 72 Cleaning 347 Fastening 42 Height adjustment 44 Message in display 378 Proper use of 44 68 Safety guidelines 64 Telltale 25 378 Seat heating 110 Seating capacity 310 Seats 35 106 Heating 110 Lumbar support 109 Memory function 111 Power 36 106 Rear bench seat 252 securing cargo 255 Selecting radio mode 205 Selector lever see gear selector lever Self test BabySmartIM air bag deactivation system
133. acity weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure Operation Tires and wheels For additional information on tire load rating see Load identification gt page 325 Tire load rating gt page 322 and tire speed rating gt page 322 are also referred to as service descrip tion Operation Tires and wheels Tire speed rating The tire speed rating gt page 322 indicates the approved maximum speed for the tire Warning A N Even when permitted by law never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury and possible death for you and for others Summer tires Index Q E E e E Ee e At the tire manufacturer s option any Speed rating up to 100 mph 160 km h up to 106 mph 170 km h up to 112 mph 180 km h up to 118 mph 190 km h up to 130 mph 210 km h up to 149 mph 240 km h up to 168 mph 270 km h up to 186 mph 300 km h above 186 mph 300 km h above 149 mph 240 km h ees ee ee eee tire with a speed capability above 149 mph 240
134. acoustic signal sounds three times if equipped and feature acti vated The locking knobs in the doors move down The anti theft alarm system is armed Selective setting If you frequently travel alone you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that pressing only unlocks the driver s door and the fuel filler flap gt Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about 5 seconds Battery check lamp gt page 94 flashes twice Controls in detail Locking and unlocking The SmartKey will then function as follows Global locking T N Unlocking driver s door and fuel filler yer di EE ae A A sae P jo ai flap j Ay TUPAS GRANES HASTE the batteries in the SmartKey are dis gt Press button once mae charged the SmartKey is malfunction M A An acoustic signal sounds three ing or the vehicle battery is drained i times if equipped and feature acti ne e Try second SmartKey e An acoustic signal sounds once vated if equipped and feature activated The locking knobs in the doors E A ane ila e The locking knob in the driver s move down meee ibd ae Cran eave 4 them if necessary gt page 393 eae e The anti theft alarm system is e The anti theft alarm system is dis armed armed e Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver s door gt page 386 and the trunk gt 387 Restoring to factory setting en Paee ey j Use the mechanical key to lock the Coa UN QGKINE gt Press and h
135. aint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child For additional information see Children in the vehicle gt page 72 Warning A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint When moving the seats make sure there are no items in the footwell or behind the seat Otherwise you could damage the seats Power seat adjustment The seat adjustment switches are located on the respective front door Ph4 25 2949 31 1 Head restraint height 2 Seat height 3 Seat cushion tilt 4 Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat backrest tilt gt Or gt gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 Open the respective door The memory function gt page 111 lets you store the settings for the power seat the steering wheel adjustment and the exterior rear view mirrors Seat fore and aft adjustment Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 4 Adjust seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator brake pedal safely The position should be as far rearward as possible consistent with ability to properly operate controls Seat cushion tilt gt Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 3 until your upper legs are lightly supported Seat backrest tilt gt
136. air bags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system s deployment thresholds You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts The passenger front air bag will only be deployed if e the front passenger seat is occupied e the EARI indicator lamp in the center console is not lit gt page 75 e the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold Do not place objects heavier than 20 Ibs 9 kg on the front passenger seat This could cause the front or side impact air bag on the front passenger side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system s deployment threshold Front side impact air bags rear side im pact air bags window curtain air bags The window curtain air bags Q fill up the area between the A and C pillars see arrows P91 60 3087 31 1 Window curtain air bag 2 Front side impact air bags 3 Rear side impact air bags The front side impact air bags rear side impact air bags and window curtain air bags are deployed e onthe impacted side of the vehicle e in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold e independently of the front air bags The front passenger side impact air bag will only deploy if the system senses that the front passenger seat is occupied The front side impact air bags rear side impact air bags and window curtain air bags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the system s deployment threshold Seat belts The use of
137. alloy TO XW7 H2 Wheel offset 1 46 in 37 mm Winter tires 2 225 45 R17 91H M S Rims light alloy 7 5 x 17 H2 Wheel offset 1 46 in 37 mm Winter tires 3 225 40 R18 92H XL Extra Load M S Rims light alloy 7 5 x 18H2 Wheel offset 1 46 in 37 mm Radial ply tires 2 Not available as factory equipment 3 For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Technical data Rims and Tires Mixed size tires Model Front axle Rims light alloy Wheel offset Summer tires 2 Rear axle Rims light alloy Wheel offset Summer tires 2 Radial ply tires 2 Must not be used with snow chains C 55 AMG 7 5 x 18 H2 1 18 in 30 mm 225 40 ZR18 92Y XL Extra Load 8 5 Jx 18 H2 1 34 in 34 mm 245 35 ZR18 92Y XL Extra Load Spare wheel collapsible tire Model Rim steel Wheel offset Tire Must not be used with snow chains Please compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim If the tire inflation pressure on the yel low label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values given in this Operator s Manual inflate the collapsible tire to the recommended tire inflation pres sure given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim Technical data Rims and Tires C55 AMG 4 5Bx 17 H2 0 47 in 12 mm 145 70 17 92P Please note that the tire inflation pr
138. amage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system The engine will overheat causing major engine damage Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution E Coolant The coolant is too hot gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location and Stop engine off turn off the engine gt Only start the engine again after the message disappears You could otherwise damage the engine During severe operating conditions and iH Warning A stop and go city traffic the coolant tem The engine should not be operated with perature may rise close to 248 F 120 C the coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Driving when your engine Is badly over heated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down Display symbol eS RARE Display message Coolant stop engine off Coolant Visit workshop Possible cause consequence The poly V belt c
139. an select from among the inserted CDs with buttons EE o EA EO CD player in the audio unit E to E CDs inthe CD changer Random tracks Repeat track The magazine slot number of the selected CD appears next to CD in the display and the number of the currently played track appears next to TRACK If there is no CD in the selected magazine slot NO CD appears in the display with the corresponding slot number Direct track entry P82 60 4456 31 You can make a direct selection from among the tracks on a CD gt Press button gt Enter track number using buttons EEE to a The number of the track being played appears next to TRACK in the display You can only enter available track numbers Skipping tracks forward backward Skipping tracks forward gt Press button briefly The next track will be played Skipping tracks backward gt Press button briefly If the track has been playing for more than 10 seconds the unit skips back to the beginning of the track currently playing If less than 10 seconds have been played the unit skips back to the beginning of the previous track Pressing the or button repeatedly will result in multiple tracks being skipped Fast forward reverse Fast forward gt Press and hold button until desired point has been reached Reverse gt Press and hold button until desired point has been reached I Oo The track number and the relative time
140. ance be tween unprotected parts of the body and the air vents If necessary use the air distribu tion control gt page 178 to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin es Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and others then adjust the interior temperature to the set value much faster Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air flow through exhaust slots below the rear window Deactivating the climate control system Warning A N When the climate control is switched off the Operating the climate control system in automatic mode When operating the climate control system in automatic mode you will Controls in detail Climate control gt Use temperature controls 2 and 3 gt page 175 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment The temperature of the vehicle interior is adjusted automatically only rarely need to adjust the tempera outside air supply and circulation are also OS ae ee oe ture air volume and air distribution switched off Only choose this setting for a short time Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and others Deactivating In automatic mode cooling with dehu Press button BG g
141. and and side air vents 2 and gt page 185 are open Closing center and side air vents gt Turn thumbwheels 3 O and gt page 184 downward The center air vents G and and side air vents 2 and gt page 184 are closed Controls in detail Automatic climate control Canada only Adjusting air volume Use button W gt page 185 for auto matic mode or air volume controls or gt page 185 to adjust air volume manually Seven blower speeds are available gt Press button to decrease or gt page 185 to increase air volume to the desired level The indicator lamp on the button Mg goes out The automatic air distribution remains switched on Front defroster You can use this setting to defrost the windshield for example if it is iced up You can also defog the windshield and the side windows Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the side windows are clear again Activating gt Press button K gt page 185 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air conditioning switches automatically to the following functions e cooling on to dehumidify e maximum blowing and heating power e air flows onto the windshield and the front side windows e the air recirculation mode is switched off Deactivating gt Press button Kem gt page 185 again The indicator lamp on the button goes out The previous settings are
142. and special equipment 2 Premium fuel required Performance may vary with fuel octane rating Vv Rims and Tires Only use tires which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes Benz Tires approved by Mercedes Benz are developed to pro vide best possible performance in con junction with the driving safety systems on your vehicle such as ABS or ESP Tires specially developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by Mercedes Benz can be identified by finding the following on the tire s side wall e MO Mercedes Benz Original equipment tires AMG vehicles Does not apply to all approved tires on AMG vehicles For information on tested and approved tires for AMG vehicles contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes Benz may result in dam age that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes Benz can have detrimen tal effects such as e poor handling characteristics e increased noise e increased fuel consumption Moreover tires and rims not approved by Mercedes Benz may under load exhibit dimensional variations and dif ferent tire deformation characteristics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts Damage to the tires or the vehi cle may be the result Technical data Rims and Tires Further information on tires and rims is a
143. and the trunk lid opens The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically Illumination of the emergency release button The button flashes 30 minutes after opening the trunk The button flashes 60 minutes after closing the trunk The emergency release button unlocks and opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing still or in motion o The emergency release button does not open the trunk lid if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected If the vehicle has previously been locked with the SmartKey opening the trunk from the inside using the emer gency release button will trigger the anti theft alarm system To cancel the alarm do one of the following e Press button or on the SmartKey e Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Valet locking To deny any unauthorized person ac cess to the trunk lock it separately with the mechanical key Leave only the SmartKey less its mechanical key with the vehicle The lock is located next to the handle above the rear license plate recess Ps 00 313 7 31 1 Neutral position 2 Locked gt Close the trunk gt page 101 gt Pull the mechanical key out of the SmartKey gt page 386 gt Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid lock Turn the mechanical key clockwise to position 2 and remove the mechani cal key in that position to lock the trunk The trunk remains locked even when the veh
144. anging a bulb Keep bulbs out of reach of children Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas A bulb can explode if you e touch or move it when hot e drop the bulb e scratch the bulb Wear eye and hand protection Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician Notes on bulb replacement Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating Switch lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits Always use a clean lint free cloth when handling bulbs Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease If the newly installed bulb does not come on visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Additional turn signals in the exterior rear view mirrors High mounted brake lamp Xenon lamps Front fog lamps Front side marker lamps Have the headlamp adjustment checked regularly Replacing bulbs for front lamps Before you start to replace a bulb for a front lamp do the following first gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position W gt page 114 gt Open the hood gt page 297 Halogen headlamp Pa2 00 2212 31 1 Housing cover for low beam headlamp 2 Housing cover for high beam head lamp parking and standing lamp Pract
145. approx 1 1 US qt 1 0 I approx 2 1 oz 60 g each 0 5 US qt 0 5 I approx 12 8 US qt 12 0 I 16 4 US gal 62 01 2 6 US gal 10 01 3 2 US gt 3 01 6 4 US gt 6 01 Service Products pamphlet or inquire at your Mercedes Benz Center Fuels coolants lubricants etc Approved engine oils MB Automatic Transmission Fluid Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 MB Power Steering Fluid Pentosin CHF 11S High temperature roller bearing grease MB Brake Fluid DOT 4 MB 325 0 Anticorrosion antifreeze agent Premium unleaded gasoline Minimum Posted Octane 91 Avg of 96 RON 86 MON R 134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil never R 12 MB Windshield Washer Concentrate 1 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point Follow suggested mixing ratios gt page 442 Engine oils Engine oils are specifically tested for their Suitability in our engines and durability for our service intervals Therefore only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance system U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicles For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters refer to the Factory Ap proved Service Products pamphlet or con tact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center H
146. ar seats Regardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recom mended for the size and weight of the child For additional information see Children in the vehicle gt page 72 A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Warning A N Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Warning A N Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck That could cause serious or even fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the Warning A N Read and observe the additional warning no tices printed in the Safety and Security section gt page 64 and gt page 67 i s F Getting started Driving With a smooth motion pull the belt from the belt outlet Place
147. are of various risks You should not remove any of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself Removal of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and or personal injury introduction Problems with your vehicle Y Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation we urge you to immediately contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction please discuss the problem with the Mercedes Benz Center management or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes Benz USA LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes Benz Canada Inc 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto Ontario M4G 4C9 Introduction Reporting safety defects For the USA only The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regulations Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Reporting Safety Defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National
148. art 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canada only This device complies with RSS 2 10 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interfer ence and Safety and Security Panic alarm 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Activating gt Press and hold button Q for at least 1 second Deactivating gt Press button Q again Insert SmartKey in starter switch Safety and Security Driving safety systems In this section you will find information on p the following driving safety systems In winter operation the maximum e ABS Antilock Brake System effectiveness of the ABS and ESP is only achieved with winter tires gt page 336 or snow chains as re e ESP Electronic Stability Program quired Warning A N The following factors increase the risk of accidents e BAS Brake Assist System e Exces
149. as specified in the vehicle placard and owner s manual The recommended tire inflation pres sures for your vehicle can be found on the tire placard located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 315 The tire in flation pressures are not listed in the owner s manual Warning AN The Run Flat Indicator does not provide a warning for wrongly selected tire inflation pressures Always adjust tire inflation pres sure according to the placard on the driver s door B pillar or fuel filler flap The Run Flat Indicator does not replace regular checks of the tire inflation pressures since a gradual pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected by the Run Flat Indicator The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure e g tire blowout caused by a foreign object In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers Operation Tires and wheels Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator The tire inflation pressure monitor must be reactivated in the following situations If you have changed the tire inflation pressure If you have replaced the wheels or tires If you have installed new wheels or tires Using the tire placard on the driver s door B pillar or if available the inside of the fuel filler flap make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is cor rect
150. ashings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions e near the ocean e in industrial areas smoke exhaust emissions e during winter operation You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion In doing so do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle A prerequisite for a thor ough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection Dam aged areas need to be re undercoated Your vehicle has been treated at the facto ry with a wax base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle Post production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes Benz because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others applied later Operation Vehicle care We have selected car care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology You can obtain Mercedes Benz approved car care products at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center scratches corrosive deposits corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car care products recommended here In such cases it is best to seek aid at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of y
151. astening the seat belt 42 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 75 357 Infant and child restraint systems 73 LATCH type child seat anchors 79 Seat belts 42 64 Odometer 125 Oil level see Engine oil level Checking oil level Oil see Engine oil One touch gearshifting Gear selector le ver Automatic transmission 162 Canceling gear range limit 162 Downshifting 162 Upshifting 162 One touch gearshifting Steering wheel gearshift control Automatic transmission 163 Operating safety 197 Ornamental moldings Cleaning 344 Outside temperature indicator 124 Outside temperature see Displays Overhead control panel 29 Overspeed range 446 P Paintwork Cleaning 342 Panic alarm 81 Parcel net In front passenger footwell 258 Parking 54 285 Parking brake 46 54 Engaging 54 Message in display 366 Releasing 46 Parking lamps Messages in display 376 Replacing bulbs 395 Parking position Exterior rear view mirrors 170 Parts service 424 Passenger compartment 290 Interior lighting 120 Interior rear view mirror 40 Main fuse boxin 421 Parcel net in front passenger footwell 258 Passenger safety see Occupant safety Pedals 283 Phone see Telephone Plastic and rubber parts Cleaning and care of 346 Poly V belt drive 446 Layout 427 Positions memory function see Seats Power assistance 283 Power outlet in rear passenger compartment 263 Power seat see Seats Power 36 113 149 Power tilt sliding sunroof 242
152. atch to vertical position and remove the bulb carrier Bulb carrier 2 Brake lamp bulb 3 Backup lamp bulb 4 Rear fog lamp driver s side only tail and standing lamp bulb Parking and side marker lamp bulb 6 Turn signal lamp bulb Press gently onto the respective bulb and turn counterclockwise out of its bulb socket Press the new bulb gently into its bulb socket and turn clockwise until it engages Reinstall the bulb carrier and lock it again with latch 1 Reinstall the trim panel Practical hints Replacing bulbs License plate lamp 1 Screw gt v v Yy Loosen both screws Q Remove the license plate lamp Replace the bulb Reinstall the license plate lamp Retighten screws Q Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Removing and installing wiper blades gt Remove SmartKey from starter switch Pull the tab 2 in the direction of arrow 1 Removing wiper blades The wiper blade is unlocked Warning AN For safety reasons switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch be fore replacing a wiper blade Otherwise the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury Lift up the wiper arm as far as you need to remove the wiper blade Carefully fold the wiper arm back to rest on the windshield Hold on to the wiper arm when folding T the wiper arm back If released the Never open the hood when the wiper EEEE force of the im
153. ating element or sides of the lighter they are extremely hot Hold the knob only When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave 1 Cover plate children unattended in the vehicle or with 2 Cigarette lighter socket With the socket damaged the TEESE to an UGG ele Yenisle Unsuper gt Briefly press the bottom of cover lighter may no longer be able to be vised use of vehicle equipment may cause plate placed in the heating pushed in posi an accident and or serious personal injury l tion or the lighter may pop out too ear The cover plate opens automatically ly with the lighter not hot enough gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 gt Push in cigarette lighter To help avoid damaging the cigarette The cigarette lighter will pop out lighter socket we recommend con automatically when hot necting 12V DC electrical accessories designed for use with the standard cigarette lighter plug type to the 12V power outlets gt page 263 in your ve hicle whenever possible Controls in detail Useful features gt Push down cover plate 1 to close gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 Telephone ashtray Pull at top of cover 2 Flip cover to the left and insert Warning A N electrical plug cigarette lighter type The cover plate engages power OULEL Never operate radio transmitters equipped
154. ations for sub entries are possible CEL Mobile phone HOM Home WOR Work FAX Fax PAG Pager TEL Main gt gt Controls in detail Audio system gt gt pb When you have selected a number press button The call will be made e Viewing the telephone number of a phone book entry gt Search for desired entry gt Press NUM soft key The telephone number of the phone book entry appears in the display e Returning calls received LL MUM ROU P82 60 4467 31 Press MEM soft key or press button WW or BA Press RCV soft key received calls The number of received calls and then the call last received appear briefly in the display Select desired telephone number with button WN or BA The letter R and the number of the memory position appear in the upper left hand corner of the display The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received When you have selected a number press button The call will be made Speed dial If you have stored telephone numbers as speed dial numbers in your telephone you can also enter these with buttons J to QM on the radio unit gt Press desired button EEE to EE briefly gt Press button The call will be made Turbo dial If you have stored telephone numbers as turbo dial numbers in your telephone you can also enter these with buttons J to QM on the radio unit gt Press desired button EEN to EE until the call is
155. ay P82 60 4451 31 gt Press or soft key to increase or decrease tone level accordingly or gt Press RES soft key briefly to reset treble tones to their center level The radio switches back to the standard radio menu 8 seconds after the last soft key is pressed Sound system You can either program the sound settings manually gt page 201 or choose settings via preset sound characteristics You can select from among the following settings STANDARD conventional stereo sound SURROUND the sound is set for better three dimensional acoustic character istics SPEECH the sound is optimized for the spoken word Press button repeatedly until STANDARD SURROUND or SPEECH appears in the display or Press lt lt lt or gt softkey repeatedly until the desired sound setting has been reached The sound is set accordingly Press RES soft key briefly The sound setting is reset depending on the sound source activated e Radio mode STANDARD e CD AUX mode SURROUND e Telephone SPEECH The radio switches back to the standard radio menu 8 seconds after the last soft key is pressed Returning sound functions to factory settings gt Press button to call up settings menu in the display or P82 60 4452 31 Press RES soft key briefly the respec tive sound function is reset to its center level Press and hold RES soft key until RESET appears in the display
156. aytime running lamp mode USA only Pi This function is not available in countries where the daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode gt Move the selection marker with button or SH to the Lighting submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until the message Hdl amp mode appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Hdlamp mode D Constant Manual O P54 32 237 3 31 gt Press button or E to select manual operation Manual or daytime running lamp mode Constant activated With daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position WEJ or EGR the low beam headlamps are switched on when the engine is running In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps For more information on the daytime running lamp mode see Lighting gt page 114 For safety reasons resetting the set tings to factory settings gt page 135 while driving will not deactivate the daytime running lamp mode The following message appears in the multifunction display Lighting Cannot be completely reset to factory sets while driving Controls in detail Control system Set locator lighting With the locator lighting feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in positi
157. ble in great vari ety Due to this variety it cannot be guaranteed that the CD changer will be able to play every user written CD The burning process can lead to data errors and aging of the medium may re sult in data loss Therefore the CD changer may be restricted in its ability to play MP3 data carriers it may play them with reduced sound quality or it may not be able to play them at all Problems may be encountered during playback of user written CDs with a storage capacity of more than 700 MB These CDs do not meet valid standards as of this printing Compatible MP3 data carriers The CD changer can read the following data carriers in MP3 mode e CD DA e CD R e CD RW Compatible file systems and compres sion methods Use Romeo or Joliet Depending on file for mat used up to 128 characters are possi ble The following compression methods are compatible e MP3 e WMA e WAV Compatible bit and sampling rates Fixed and variable bit rates of up to 320 kBit s are possible The following table lists possible sampling rates MPEG1 44 1 KHz 48 KHz Audio Layer3 32 KHZ MPEG2 22 5 KHz 24 KHz Audio Layer3 16 KHz MPEG2 5 11 025 KHz Audio Layer3 12 KHz 8 KHz WMA 32 KHz 44 1 KHz 48 KHz Only use MP3 tracks with a bit rate of 128 kBit s or higher and with the spec ified sampling rates The use of rates other than those spec ified may lead to noticeably inferior sound quali
158. bsolutely certain that the engine speed does not reach the red marking on the tachometer gt page 24 Otherwise the engine could be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D direction or gt Briefly press button 2 on the right side of the steering wheel gt page 163 The transmission shifts to the next higher gear If instead of the manual program mode symbol M the symbol appears in the multifunction display gt page 156 shift to the next higher gear The fuel supply will otherwise be interrupted to prevent the engine from overrevving Downshifting A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control Warning gt Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the D direction or gt Briefly press button on the left side of the steering wheel gt page 163 The transmission shifts to the next lower gear When you brake or stop the transmis sion shifts down to a gear from which you can easily accelerate or take off Controls in detail Automatic transmission Kickdown Using the kickdown when driving in the manual program mode M is not possible Deactivating manual shift program gt Press the program mo
159. can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Your vehicle is equipped with either the Tire and Loading Information placard Example A or the Vehicle Tire Information placard Example B located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 309 The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be ad justed on cold tires The tires can be con sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than one mile 1 6 km Follow recommended cold tire inflation pressures listed on placard Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best handling tread life and riding comfort In addition to the tire placard on the driver s door B pillar also consult the fuel filler flap for any additional information pertaining to special driving situations For more information see Important notes on tire inflation pressure gt page 316 Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only Tire data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustra tions below Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle Operation Tires and wheels Placard Example A SEE OWNER S FRONT P195 70R14 200KPA 29P31 MANUAL FOR Rean piws
160. ce the gear selector lever in position P Do not depress the accelerator Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 gt page 33 and release it again immediately The engine then starts automatically For information on turning off the engine see Turning off engine gt page 56 Starting difficulties If the engine does not start as described carry out the following steps gt gt Turn the SmartKey in starter switch to position O and repeat the starting procedure gt page 45 Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the vehicle battery Get a jump start gt page 415 If the engine does not start after several starting attempts there could be a mal function in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system gt Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Parking brake A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could release the parking brake which could result in an accident and or serious injury Warning Driving Warning UN On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of loss of control 1 Release handle
161. cident Incase of 53 Active head restraint 71 391 Active head restraints see Head restraints Additional turn signals 395 Airbags 61 BabySmart deactivation system 75 443 Children 75 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 27 75 357 Front Driver 65 Front Passenger 65 Passenger 65 Safety guidelines 64 Side impact front and rear 66 Window curtain 66 Air conditioning refrigerant 437 Air conditioning system Automatic climate control Canada only 184 Climate control 174 Air conditioning Cooling Automatic climate control Canada only 194 Climate control 182 Air distribution Automatic climate control Canada only 189 Climate control 178 Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure Air pump electric Turning on 409 Air recirculation mode Automatic climate control Canada only 191 Climate control 180 Air vents Front Automatic climate control Canada only 185 Climate control 175 Air vents Rear Automatic climate control Canada only 196 Climate control 183 Air volume Automatic climate control Canada only 190 Climate control 178 Alignment bolt vehicle tool kit 406 443 Anticorrosion antifreeze 440 441 Anti theft systems 88 Anti theft alarm system 88 Immobilizer 88 Tow away alarm 90 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning Armrest 257 Ashtrays 260 Aspect ratio 331 ATF Automatic transmission fluid 301 AUDIO menu Control system 131 Audio system 197 Audio and telephone operation
162. ck backrest in its upright position Loading instructions P00 01 2270 31 The total load weight including vehicle occupants and luggage cargo should not exceed the load limit or vehicle capacity weight indicated on the corresponding placard located on the driver s door B pillar The handling characteristics of a fully load ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis tribution It is therefore recommended to load the vehicle according to the illustra tions shown with the heaviest items being placed towards the front of the vehicle Always place items being carried against front or rear seat backrests and fasten them as securely as possible The heaviest portion of the cargo should al ways be kept as low as possible since it in fluences the handling characteristics of the vehicle A Always fasten items being carried as secure ly as possible using cargo tie down rings and fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the load Warning In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and can cause in jury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle To help avoid personal injury during a colli sion or sudden maneuver exercise care when transporting cargo Never drive vehicle with trunk open Deadly carbon monoxide CO gases may enter ve hicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and dea
163. cle and may vary from data shown in above illustration For more information see Rims and Tires gt page 429 Operation Tires and wheels Tire size designation load and speed rating C Tire width 2 Aspect ratio in 3 Radial tire code 4 Rim diameter Tire load rating Tire speed rating For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration General Depending on the design standards used the tire size molded into the sidewall may have no letter or a letter preceding the tire size designation No letter preceding the size designation as illustrated above Passenger car tire based on European design standards Letter P preceding the size designation Passenger car tire based on U S design standards Letter LT preceding the size designation Light Truck tire based on U S design standards Letter T preceding the size designation Temporary spare tires which are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tire width The tire width G gt page 322 indicates the nominal tire width in mm Aspect ratio The aspect ratio 2 gt page 322 is the dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width and is expressed in percentage The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing section height by section width Tire code The t
164. comes on e for about 4 seconds when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 e for about 4 seconds when you start the engine by turning the SmartKey a The H indicator lamp remains lit if the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 2 and left there The indicator lamp will go out when you start the engine The ESM indicator lamp goes out shortly after you start the engine This shows that the restraint systems are operational A malfunction in the system has been detected if the EGS indicator lamp e fails to extinguish after approximately 4 seconds e does not come on at all e comes on after the engine was started or while driving For safety reasons we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the system checked For more information see Practical hints gt page 356 Warning AN In the event that the H indicator lamp comes on during driving or does not come on at all the SRS self check has detected a malfunction For your safety we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an acci dent which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury In addition improper work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
165. could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants The parcel net cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident Cup holders Warning A N In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants and or vehicle equip ment only use containers that fit into the cup holder Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents especially hot liquids could spill during braking vehicle maneuvers or an ac cident Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may cause serious personal injury Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty When not in use keep the cup holder closed An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking vehicle maneuvers or in an acci dent Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup holder may come loose during braking vehi cle maneuvers or in an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior Objects thrown around in the vehicle interi or may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Cup holders in front of seat armrest Underneath the swiveling cup holder is another stationary cup holder You can only use this when the swiveling cup holder is pulled out and completely turned outward Controls in detail Useful features Sliding out swiveling cup holder Turning swiveling cup holder outward Turning s
166. could result in a short circuit Use leak proof battery only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident Never loosen or detach battery termi nal clamps while the engine is running or the SmartKey is in the starter switch Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be se verely damaged Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further information Practical hints 1 Negative terminal 2 Positive terminal cover 85 31 Disconnecting the battery Warning A With a disconnected battery vy vY v vy Yy you will no longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter switch the gear selector lever will remain locked in position P Always disconnect the battery in the order described below Otherwise the vehicle s electronics can be damaged Depress the parking brake pedal Make sure the gear selector lever is set to position P Turn off all electrical consumers Turn off the engine gt page 56 Remove SmartKey from starter switch Open the hood gt page 297 gt Remove the filter box gt page 411 Disconnect the battery negative lead from negative terminal Q Remove cover 2 from the positive terminal Disconnect the battery positive lead Removing the battery gt Remove the screw
167. could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows You should therefore switch off the windshield wipers when weather condi tions are dry Vehicles with rain sensor Intermittent wiping interval is dependent on wetness of windshield gt Turn the combination switch to position I Vehicles with rain sensor After the initial wipe pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by the rain sensor Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is opened This protects persons getting into or out of the vehicle from being sprayed Intermittent wiping will be continued when e all doors are closed and e the gear selector lever is in position Dor R or e the wiper setting is changed using the combination switch Getting started Single wipe gt Press the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow Q to the resistance point The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid Wiping with windshield washer fluid gt Press the combination switch in direc tion of arrow Q past the resistance point The windshield wipers operate with washer fluid To prevent smears on the windshield wipe with windshield washer fluid every now and then even when it is raining For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 304 Getting star
168. ction can be seen in vehicles with audio system or in vehicles with COMAND if the time synchronization with head unit feature was set to Off gt Move the selection marker with button or SH to the Time Date submenu gt Press button JM or R repeatedly until the message Change over Summer Winter time appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Change over Summer Winter Lime Automatic P54 392 2369 31 gt Press button or E to select if the changeover between summer and winter time should be automatic or manual Set the date month This function can be seen in vehicles with audio system or in vehicles with COMAND if the time synchronization with head unit feature was set to Off a Vehicles with COMAND For information on setting the date refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions gt Move the selection marker with button or SSH to the Time Date submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until the message Date Set MM appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the month setting Date Set Mr D M 2372004 P54 32 237 1 31 gt Press button or E to set the month Controls in detail Control system Set the date day The selection marker is on the day Set the date year This function can be seen in vehicles with setting This function can be seen in vehicles with
169. ctions regarding use of an external antenna Catalytic converter Your Mercedes Benz is equipped with monolithic type catalytic converters an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet To prevent damage to the catalytic converters only use premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be repaired promptly Otherwise excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter causing it to overheat and potentially start a fire Warning AN As with any vehicle do not idle park or operate this vehicle in areas where combus tible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Operation Driving instructions Emission control Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law These systems of course will function properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications Any adjustments on the engine should therefore be carried out only by qualified Mercedes Benz Center authorized techni cians Engine adjustments should not be a
170. ctivation process takes approxi mately 5 to 10 minutes after calling the SIRIUS Service Center After activation of the satellite radio service The satellite radio main menu appears The radio station selected last is audible provided it can be received The system will tune to a default station if no station had been selected previously P82 60 4460 31 The first channel 001 is called up and the PTY system changes to All categories If no station can be received ACQUIRING appears in the display If the Satellite radio service is not activated ACQUIRING will also appear in the radio display and NO SAT will appear in the multifunction display Controls in detail Audio system Selecting a station The following options are available e Selecting a station using the selected category gt page 212 e Tuning via station presets gt page 211 e Tuning via scan search gt page 213 e Tuning via manual channel input gt page 212 e Tuning via the program category list gt page 212 Tuning via station presets Ten satellite radio station presets are available You can access the presets via number keys Controls in detail Audio system Accessing via number keys gt Press button e Selecting a category gt Enter number of preset you wish to Input line appears in the main radio gt Press PTY soft key select e g SM menu The radio plays the station stored gt Use
171. ctronic components Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle Some safety systems only function while the engine is running You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving Warning A N Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires wheels for example when running over an obstacle road debris or a pothole may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety of your vehicle If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride distur bance or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on your hazard warning flashers carefully slow down and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires wheels for possible damage If the vehicle appears unsafe have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs Proper use of the vehicle p Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are familiar with the following information and rules e the safety precautions in this manual e the Technical data section in this manual e traffic rules and regulations e motor vehicle laws and safety standards Warning A N Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle These warning labels are intended to make you and others aw
172. d after 6 years regardless of the remaining tread Tread depth Do not allow your tires to wear down too far Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under 7 in 3 mm Treadwear indicators TWI are required by law These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approx imately ber in 1 6 mm at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced Recommended minimum tire tread depth e Summer tires Lye in 3 mm e Winter tires a in 4 mm Warning A N Although the applicable federal motor safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators TWI become visible at approximately ae in 1 6 mm we recommend that you do not allow your tires Operation Tires and wheels to wear down to that level As tread depth SCONE MICE approaches Ve in 3 mm the adhesion T properties on a wet road are sharply Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry eeen place with as little exposure to light as Depending upon the weather and or road possible Protect tires from contact surface conditions the tire traction varies with oil grease and gasoline widely Cleaning tires Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire Always replace a damaged tire C TWI TreadWear Indicator The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread
173. d for the Maintenance system U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicles or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System U S vehicles or FSS Canada vehicles will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 1 Filler cap gt Unscrew filler cap C from filler neck gt Add engine oil as required Be careful not to overfill with oil Be careful not to spill any oil when adding Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt Screw filler cap Q back on filler neck For more information on engine oil see the Technical data section gt page 436 and gt page 437 Operation Engine compartment Transmission fluid level The transmission fluid level does not need to be checked If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions have an authorized Mercedes Benz Center check the transmission Coolant level The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion antifreeze To check the coolant level the vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine must be cool Operation Engine compartment Warning A In order to avoid any possibly serious burns Use extreme caution when opening
174. d other things beyond the service provider s or our control Service might also not be available in certain places e g in tunnels parking garages or Calling up the SAT main menu gt Press SAT soft key SAT is displayed in the upper left hand corner of the display Prior to activation of the satellite radio service gt page 210 After activation of satellite radio service gt page 211 within or next to buildings or near Note that categories and channels other technologies shown in illustrations are dependent on programming content delivered by the service provider Programming content is subject to change Therefore channels and categories shown in illustrations and descriptions contained in this manual may differ from the channels and categories delivered by the service provider Prior to activation of the satellite radio service Program categories The channels are categorized Categories allow you to tune to stations broadcasting a certain type of program category mode gt page 212 P82 60 4463 31 The telephone number of the SIRIUS service Center 888 539 7474 is displayed gt Press ESN soft key The twelve digit electronic serial number ESN of the SAT tuner installed in your vehicle is displayed This information is required to call the SIRIUS Service Center for an activation request Credit card information may also be required for your application The a
175. d since start 3 Average speed since start 4 Average fuel consumption since start Fuel consumption since last reset gt Press button or repeatedly gt until the first function of the trip computer menu appears in the multifunction display gt Press button RANG or Red repeatedly until the message After reset appears in the multifunction display gt After reset 750 mi 1 15 00 h 50 Mph 3 21 4 ml So P54 32 2390 31 1 Distance driven since last reset 2 Time elapsed since last reset 3 Average speed since last reset 4 Average fuel consumption since last reset Resetting fuel consumption statistics Press button or repeatedly until the first function of the trip computer menu appears in the multifunction display Press button J or Ref repeatedly until the reading that you want to reset appears in the multifunction display Press and hold the reset button in the instrument cluster gt page 122 until the value is reset to 0 Controls in detail Control system Distance to empty gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 gt Press button or repeatedly until the first function of the trip computer menu appears in the multifunction display gt Press button JM or ed repeatedly until the message Distance appears in the multifunction display The calculated range based on the current fuel tank level appears in the multifunction display Distance
176. d the night security Warning A N the exterior lamp switch in illumination are described in the Control s position M For switching on the fog system section see Set locator lighting In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions lamps turn the exterior lamp switch to gt page 145 and Setting night security only switch from position RAA to E with position first illumination gt page 146 the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location Switching from EGY to will briefly Front fog lamps switch off the headlamps Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident gt Switch on the low beam headlamps gt page 114 gt Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first Q stop Fog lamps will operate with the parking The front fog lamps switch on lamps and or the low beam headlamps The green indicator lamp in the on Fog lamps should only be used in exterior lamp switch comes on conjunction with low beam headlamps gt page 114 Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permis sible lamp operation The front fog lamps switch off Push in the exterior lamp switch The green indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch goes out Controls in detail Lighting Rear fog lamp driver s side only gt Switch on the front fog lamps gt page 117 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to second stop The rear fog lamp is switched on The
177. d winter tires Index Q M S up to 100 mph 160 km h T M S up to 118 mph H M S up to 130 mph V M S upto 149 mph 240 km h 1 Speed rating 190 km h 210 km h or M S for winter tires Operation Tires and wheels i Load identification Not all M S rated tires provide special winter performance Make sure the tires you use show M S and the moun tain snowflake marking on the tire sidewall These tires meet specific snow traction performance require ments of the Rubber Manufacturers As sociation RMA and the Rubber Association of Canada RAC and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions 1 Load identification o For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration Operation Tires and wheels In addition to tire load rating special load information may be molded into the tire sidewall following the letter designating the tire speed rating Q gt page 325 No specification given absence of any text like in above example indicates a standard load SL tire XL or Extra Load designates an extra load or reinforced tire Light Load designates a light load tire C D E designates load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure DOT Tire Identification Number TIN U S tire regulations require each new tire
178. damaged Turn off all electrical consumers Remove SmartKey from starter switch Connect the battery positive lead and fasten its cover 2 Connect the battery negative lead Never invert the terminal connections Reinstall the filter box gt page 411 Practical hints Battery a Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Large 12 volt storage batteries contain lead Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries e Set the clock gt page 140 for recycling Vehicles with COMAND See COMAND operator s manual The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of battery power e g due to reconnec tion e Synchronize side windows gt page 240 e Synchronize tilt sliding sunroof gt page 244 Y Jump starting Warning A N Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting you might get injured Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and very explosive K
179. danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure press and hold button eg Controls in detail Power windows gt Aim transmitter eye at the driver s door handle The SmartKey must be in close proximity to the door handle gt Press and hold button until the windows and the tilt sliding sunroof are completely closed gt Release the button to stop procedure Make sure all windows and the tilt sliding sunroof are properly closed before leaving the vehicle Controls in detail Power tilt sliding sunroof Opening and closing the power With the sunroof closed or tilted open a tilt sliding sunroof screen can be slid into the roof opening to Warning A S guard against sun rays When sliding the The tilt sliding sunroof can be opened and sunroof open the screen will also retract When closing the tilt sliding sunroof make closed electrically The switch for the i sure there is no danger of anyone being tilt sliding sunroof is on the overhead l S harmed by the closing procedure control panel The opening closing procedure of the tilt sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or if the switch was moved past the resistance point and released by moving the switch in any direction The tilt sliding sunroof is made out of glass In the event of an accident the glass may shatter This may result in an opening in the
180. de selector switch gt page 165 repeatedly until C or S appears in the multifunction display or gt Restart the engine The transmission will go to the automatic program mode C or S The manual program mode M is not stored Controls in detail Automatic transmission Emergency operation Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration becomes less re sponsive or sluggish or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in limp home emergency operation mode In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be selected Stop the vehicle in a safe location vy Move gear selector lever to P vy Turn off the engine Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting vy Restart the engine Move gear selector lever to position D for second gear or R gt Have the transmission checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Controls in detail Good visibility Y Good visibility For information on the windshield wipers Rear view mirrors see Windshield wipers gt page 50 The headlamps will automatically be For more information on setting the rear cleaned when you have Headlamp cleaning system view mirrors see Mirrors gt page 40 m e switched on the headlamps The button is located on the left side of the and Auto dimming rear view mirrors ciliate e operated the windshield wipers The reflection brightnes
181. dometer 2 Main odometer 3 Current program mode automatic transmission 4 Current gear selector lever position gear range automatic transmission Digital clock 6 Status indicator outside tempera ture digital soeedometer Controls in detail Control system Multifunction steering wheel The displays in the multifunction display and the settings in the control system are controlled by the buttons on the multifunc tion steering wheel Multifunction display Operating the control system Telephone Press button to take a call to dial a call to end a call to reject an incoming call Selecting the submenu or setting the volume Press button up to increase E down to decrease Menu systems Press button for next menu for previous menu Moving within a menu Press button Wag for next display B for previous display Depending on the selected menu gt page 129 pressing the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is shown in the multifunction display The information available in the multifunc tion display is arranged in menus each containing a number of functions or sub menus The individual functions are then found within the relevant menu radio or CD op erations under Audio for example These functions serve to call up relevant informa tion or to customize the settings for your vehicle It is helpful to think of the menus and the
182. driver when the next vehicle mainte nance service is due FSS evaluates engine temperature oil level vehicle speed engine speed distance driven and the time elapsed since your last maintenance service and calls for the next maintenance service accordingly GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating gt page 332 Gear range Number of gears which are available to the automatic transmission for shifting The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the gear selector lever GPS Global Positioning System Satellite based system for relaying geographic location information to and from vehicles equipped with special receivers Employs CD digital maps for navigation GVW Gross Vehicle Weight gt page 332 GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating gt page 332 Instrument cluster The displays and indicator warning lamps in the driver s field of vision including the tachometer speedo meter engine temperature display and fuel gauge Kickdown Depressing the accelerator past the point of resistance shifts the transmis sion down to the lowest possible gear This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal acceleration needs Kilopascal kPa gt page 332 Locking knob Knob on the door which indicates whether the door is locked or un locked Pushing the locking knob down on an individual door from inside will lock that door Main
183. ds free microphone 29 W Warning lamps see Lamps indicator and warning Warning sounds Driver or front passenger seat belt 69 Parking brake 47 Seat belt telltale 355 Warranty coverage 10 425 Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid Washer reservoir level 295 Washing the vehicle 341 Wear pattern tires 335 Weights Vehicle 435 Wheel Bolts 385 Removing 406 Spare 383 433 Tightening torque 410 Wheels Tires 305 Window curtain airbags 66 Windows see Power windows Windshield Cleaning 345 Defogging 180 191 Replacing wiper blades 402 Washer fluid 304 442 Washer system 442 Windshield washer fluid 442 Message in display 379 Mixing ratio 442 Refilling 304 Wiping with 51 Windshield washer system 442 Windshield wipers 50 Cleaning 345 Replacing wiper blades 402 Winter driving 336 Block heater Canada only 337 Snow chains 337 Tires 336 Winter driving instructions 288 Winter tires 336 Wiper blades Cleaning 345 Replacing 402 Wood trims Cleaning 347 Service and Literature Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes Benz parts to service your vehicle properly For expert advice and quality service contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Center If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle please contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle For further informat
184. ds the road curb e Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch e Take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle when leaving Tires A If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance or you suspect that possi ble damage to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on the hazard warning flash ers carefully slow down and drive with cau tion to an area which is a safe distance from the road Warning Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody for possible damage If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe have the vehicle towed to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center or tire dealer for repairs Treadwear indicators TWI are required by law These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately er in 1 6 mm at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced The treadwear indicator appears as a Solid band across the tread AA Warning Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators TWI become visible at approximately We in 1 6 mm we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level As tread depth approaches Ve in 3 mm the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced Depending upon the weather and or road surface conditions the tire traction
185. e rolling code feature Controls in detail Useful features Step 7 gt To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons repeat the steps above starting with step 3 Rolling code programming To train a garage door opener or other rolling code devices with the rolling code feature follow these instructions after completing the Programming portion steps 1 through 6 of this text A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier Controls in detail Useful features Step 8 gt Locate training button on the garage door opener motor head unit Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand Depending on manufacturer the training button may also be referred to as learn or smart button If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button refer to the garage door opener operator s manual Step 9 gt Press the training button on the ga rage door opener motor head unit The training light is activated You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow ing two steps Step 10 gt Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for 2 seconds and release the pro grammed signal transmitter button 2 or Step 11 gt Press hold for 2 seconds and release same signal transmitter button a sec ond time to complete the training pro cess I O Some garage door opener
186. e and only use the telephone when road weather and traffic conditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle Only operate the COMAND Cockpit Man agement and Data System if road weather and traffic conditions permit Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Observe all legal requirements You can take and place telephone calls using the and buttons on the steering wheel To carry out other tele phone functions use the control system gt page 152 See separate operating manual for instruc tions on how to use the telephone Tele Aid T The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the button Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated If you have any questions regarding activation please call the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid acquaintance call you will receive a user ID and password By visiting www mbusa com and selecting Tele Aid USA only you will have access to account information remote door unlock and more The Tele Aid system Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand
187. e are available Arming the tow away alarm gt Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey The tow away alarm is automatically armed after about 30 seconds When you unlock the vehicle the tow away protection disarms automatically The tow away alarm remains disarmed until you lock the vehicle again Disarming the tow away alarm To prevent triggering the tow away alarm switch off the tow away alarm feature before towing the vehicle or when parking on a surface subject to movement such as a ferry or auto train The switch is located on the center console 1 Tow away alarm off switch 2 Indicator lamp gt Switch off the ignition gt page 33 gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch You cannot disarm the tow away alarm while the ignition is switched on gt Press tow away alarm off switch Q Indicator lamp in the tow away alarm off switch comes on briefly gt Exit the vehicle gt Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey The tow away alarm remains disarmed until you lock the vehicle again Safety and Security Anti theft systems Canceling the tow away alarm To cancel the alarm gt Press the or button on the SmartKey or gt Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Seats Memory function Lighting Instrument cluster Control system Automatic transmission Good visibility Climate control Automatic cli
188. e get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down Vv At the gas station Refueling Warning A N Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous It burns violently and can cause serious injury Whenever you are around gasoline avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact extinguish all smoking materials Never allow sparks flame or smoking materials near gasoline The fuel filler flap is located on the right hand side of the vehicle towards the rear Locking unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey automatically locks unlocks the fuel filler flap In case that the central locking system does not release the fuel filler flap or the opening mechanism is clamping notify Roadside Assistance or an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center 1 To open the fuel filler flap 2 To insert the fuel filler cap 3 Supplemental tire inflation pressure information Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 average of 96 RON 86 MON Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump For more information on gasoline see Premium unleaded gasoline gt page 438 or the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet Operation At the gas station Turn the engine off by turning the SmartKey to position 0 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at the point indicated by arr
189. e Insert the SmartKey in the starter Slide mechanical key 2 out of the wise to position Q switch housing The driver s door is unlocked Unlocking and opening the trunk A minimum height clearance of 5 71 ft 1 74 m is required to open the trunk lid The trunk lid lock is located next to the handle above the rear license plate recess 1 Unlocking in an emergency 2 Handle Pa0 20 2571 31 Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock until it stops Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1 The trunk lid unlocks Pull on handle 2 The trunk opens The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance Turn the mechanical key back and remove it from the trunk lid lock Locking the vehicle If you can not lock the vehicle with the SmartKey do the following gt Close the passenger door the rear doors and the trunk gt Press the central locking switch in the center console gt page 104 gt Check to see whether the locking knobs on the doors have moved down gt Ifnecessary push them down manually Remove the mechanical key out of the SmartKey gt page 386 Check whether the trunk is locked If necessary lock the trunk with the mechanical key gt page 103 gt Close the drivers door Except for the driver s door the veh
190. e Run Flat Indicator are deactivated The brake system is still functioning normally but without the systems specified above The ESP or the ESP display is malfunctioning Possible solution gt Continue driving with added caution gt If necessary have the generator and bat tery checked When the voltage is above this value again the ESP is operational again gt Continue driving with added caution gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident gt Continue driving with added caution gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident Display message Possible cause consequence SRS Restraint system malfunction Drive to workshop Warning A N In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above the SRS may not be operational The system is malfunctioning For your safety we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not be deployed when needed in an accident which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Drive with added caution to the nearest authori
191. e SmartKey from the starter switch The immobilizer is activated The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P Releasing seat belts gt Press the seat belt release button gt page 43 Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that the seat belt and or latch plate cannot get caught or pinched in the door or in the seat mechanism This can damage the seat belt and impair the effectiveness of the seat belt and or cause damage to the door and or door trim panel Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Damaged seat belts must be replaced Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Locking Warning A N To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors Be espe cially careful when small children are around Before closing doors make sure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury For more information see Locking and Wit
192. e an Make sure the movement of the rear window sunshade is not restricted by objects on the rear window shelf Oth erwise the sunshade or the objects could be damaged gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 accident and or serious personal injury Always raise the sunshade fully for its support against the window frame The raising or lowering procedure can be immediately halted by briefly pressing the switch The switch is located in the center console l i l Raising or lowering the sunshade Briefly press switch again to raise or lower the rear window sunshade completely gt Press switch Q briefly The sunshade Is raised or lowered com pletely Stopping the raising or lowering procedure gt Press switch Q again The sunshade stops Controls in detail Good visibility Rear window defroster Activating T E If the rear window defroster switches The rear window defroster uses a large ee button Bil or ei i climate control panel gt page 175 or off too soon and the indicator lamp amount of power To keep the battery ar a l automatic climate control panel starts flashing this means that too drain to a minimum switch off the i gt page 185 many electrical consumers are defroster as soon as the rear window is operating simultaneously and there is cigan AEE AOA OEG LNO insufficient voltage in the battery The The defroster is automatically deactivated i a system responds a
193. e beginning the procedure Straighten the antenna wire from the garage door opener assembly This may help improve transmitting and or receiving signals Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible with the integrated remote control If you should experi ence further difficulties with program ming the integrated remote control contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA only at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Controls in detail Useful features Canada only This device complies with RSS 2 10 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Operation The first 1000 miles 1500 k
194. e cooling function switches off after a short delay Activating Moist air can fog up the windows You can dehumidify the air with the air condi tioning gt Press button gt page 185 again The indicator lamp on the button comes on Controls in detail Automatic climate control Canada only The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer If the air conditioning cannot be turned on again this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant The compressor has turned itself off Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Residual heat and ventilation With the engine switched off it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine How long the system will provide heating depends on e the coolant temperature e the temperature set by the operator The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting Activating gt Switch off the ignition gt page 33 gt Press button gt page 185 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Controls in detail Automatic climate control Canada only Deactivating gt Press button gt page 185 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The residual heat is automatically turned
195. e exces sive heat build up and possibly a fire Symbol messages Display symbol Display message Battery Alternator Visit workshop Low voltage Charge battery Low voltage Consumers off Possible cause consequence The battery is no longer charging Possible causes e broken poly V belt e alternator malfunctioning The battery has insufficient voltage The battery has insufficient voltage Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Stop immediately and check the poly V belt in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so If it is broken gt Do not continue to drive Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If it is intact gt Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Start the engine gt page 45 gt Turn off unnecessary electrical consumers Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution USA only Release You are driving with the parking brake gt Release the parking brake OW Canada only Parking brake set gt page 46 O Brake wear The brake pads have reached their wear Have the brake pads replaced as soon Visit workshop limit as possible USA only Brake fluid There is insufficient brake fluid in the Risk of accident Stop the vehicle and
196. e tires different tire dimension front vs rear tire rotation is not possible If applicable to your vehicle s tire configu ration tires can be rotated according to the tire manufacturer s recommended in tervals in the tire manufacturer s warranty pamphlet located in your vehicle literature portfolio If none is available tires should be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles 5000 to 10000 km or sooner if neces sary according to the degree of tire wear The same rotation spinning direction must be maintained gt page 308 Rotate tires before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible shoulder wear on front tires and tread center wear on rear tires Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels and brake disks i e the inner side of the wheels tires during each rotation Check for and ensure proper tire inflation pressure Operation Tires and wheels A Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a torque of 80 Ib ft 110 Nm Warning Only use genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for your vehicle s rims For information on wheel change see the Practical hints section gt page 380 and gt page 404 Operation Winter driving Before the onset of winter have your vehicle winterized at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center This service includes e Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze concent
197. e underinflated Warning A N Follow recommended tire inflation pres sures Do not overinflate tires Overinflating tires can result in sudden deflation blowout be cause they are more likely to become punc tured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Operation Tires and wheels Checking tire inflation pressure manually Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire inflation pressure gt Remove the cap from the valve on one tire gt Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve gt Read tire inflation pressure on tire gauge and check against the recom mended tire inflation pressure on the placard on the driver s door B pillar gt page 315 If necessary add air to achieve the recommended tire inflation pressure gt gt Operation Tires and wheels D gt If you have overfilled the tire release tire inflation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the valve with e g a tip of a pen Then recheck the tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge gt Install the valve cap gt Repeat this procedure for e
198. eature can be activat ed or deactivated in the Convenience sub menu of the control system gt page 148 A You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy entry exit feature is activated Warning To cancel steering wheel movement do one of the following e Move steering column stalk gt page 38 e Press memory position switch gt page 112 Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could open the driver s door and unintentionally activate the easy entry exit feature which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury With the easy entry exit feature activated the steering wheel will return to its last set position when you e close the driver s door with the ignition switched on Or e insert the SmartKey into the starter switch with the driver s door closed The last set steering wheel position is stored when e the ignition is switched off e the position is stored in memory gt page 112 Getting started Adjusting With the easy entry exit feature activated the steering wheel tilts upwards when you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Or open the driver s door with the SmartKey in starter switch position O or 1 If the current position for the steering wheel is in the uppermost tilt position the steering wheel will no long
199. ed press soft key and hold to delete the complete number gt D Controls in detail Audio system gt gt Press OK soft key after entering correct code The telephone is unlocked If you have entered an incorrect code you must enter the correct code Switching off the telephone gt Press button for approx 3 seconds PROCESSING appears in the display until the telephone is off Afterward PHONE OFF appears in the display Adjusting the volume gt Turn rotary control of button during a telephone call The volume will increase or decrease depending on the direction turned _ The volume can be adjusted separately _ for telephone mode and audio mode Adjusting sound gt Adjust sound during a telephone call Sound adjustment gt page 201 Placing a call Entering a telephone number and starting the dialing process PR 60 4556 31 gt Enter desired telephone number using buttons J to Fg The number can have up to 32 digits but only twelve of these are visible in the display gt If necessary correct number entered with the CLR soft key Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered press soft key and hold to delete the complete number gt After correct telephone number has been entered press button If the telephone number has been saved together with a name in the phone book the name will appear in the display Phone book The numbers st
200. eep flames or sparks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding causing personal injury Read all instructions before proceeding Do not tow start the vehicle Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit If engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts have it checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter and may present a fire risk Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery Practical hints Jump starting If the battery is discharged the engine can be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle Observe the following e Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic con verter are cold e Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen Let the battery thaw out first e Only jump start from batteries with the same voltage rating 12 V Jump starting with a more powerful battery could damage the vehicle s electrical system which will not be covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty e Only use jumper cables
201. eld remote control is available for the same device try the Erasing the integrated remote control Programming tips memory gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 gt Simultaneously press and hold down the outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4 for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lamp flashes rap idly Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds The codes of all three channels are erased If you sell your vehicle erase the codes of all three channels If you are having difficulty programming the integrated remote control here are some helpful tips e Check the frequency of the hand held remote control typically located on the reverse side of the remote The in tegrated remote control is compatible with radio frequency devices operating between 288 399 MHZ e Puta new battery in the hand held re mote control 5 This will increase the likelihood of the hand held remote con trol sending a faster and more accurate signal to the integrated remote control e While performing step 3 hold the hand held remote control 6 at differ ent lengths and angles from the signal transmitter button or you are programming Attempt varying an gles at the distance of 2 to 5 inches 5 to 12 cm away or the same angle at varying distances programming steps again using that other hand held remote control Make sure new batteries are in the hand held remote control befor
202. ely reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide un der the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the ab domen or neck That could cause serious or fatal injuries The seat back and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt gt page 42 Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted Getting started Adjusting Warning VAN When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch the power seats can be operated when the respective door is open Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equip ment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Getting started Adjusting A According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible Regardless of seating position children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or toddler restr
203. en the message Please wait disappears the phone book has been loaded Controls in detail Control system Press button BeN or Ref repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order TEL lt gt filler SF P54 392 27395 31 C Name from the phone book gt gt gt D Controls in detail Control system If you press and hold button EAN or KA for longer than 1 second the system scrolls rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again Cancel the quick search mode by pressing button fan Press button The system dials the selected phone number e Ifthe connection is successful the name of the party you called and the duration of the call will appear in the multifunction display TEL 00024 Miller P54 32 2396 31 If no connection is made the control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory Redialing The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers This eliminates the need to search through your entire phone book gt Press button or repeatedly until the message TEL appears in the multifunction display Press button F The first number in the redial memory appears in the multifunction display Press button JA or Ref repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display P
204. en using the equip ment Do not operate the electric air pump longer than 6 minutes without interrup tion Otherwise it may overheat You may operate the electric air pump again after it has cooled off Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 If the tire pressure is above 51 psi 3 5 bar release excess tire pressure using the vent screw Practical hints Flat tire A Follow recommend inflation pressures Warning Do not overinflate tires Overinflating tires can result in sudden deflation blowout be cause they are more likely to become punc tured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated Detach the electric air pump Store the electrical plug and the air hose behind the flap and place the electric air pump back in the trunk Practical hints Flat tire Lowering the vehicle Warning A N Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly mounted Warning A N Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 80 Ib ft 110 Nm Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric pump gt page 408 before lowering the ve Before storing the jack it should be fully ele fiini n col
205. enisearsens 104 GES saperia ira a a 106 Front seat active head restraints 106 Rear seat head restraints 106 Lumbar SUPPOIt cseeeeeeeeees 109 Seat NEAatiNG cecccsssecceessscees 110 Memory function eecccceeeeeeeeeeees 111 Storing positions into memory 112 Recalling positions from memory 112 Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position cseeeceeeeecees 113 E Lighting aa 114 Exterior lamp Switch 088 114 Combination Switch c 0006 118 Hazard warning flasher 119 Interior lighting ccccceseseees 120 Door entry lamps ccceeeeee eens 121 Trunk ATID Soossaccsiosccassucevendeapsceceres 121 Instrument cluster eee ceeeeece eee ees 122 Instrument cluster illumination 122 Coolant temperature gauge 123 Trip odometer ccccceseeceeeeees 123 TACMOMO LC isc cvenecpesaeatvndiaoiesvoneres 124 Outside temperature indicator 124 Control system wiccadsnnventavncorensnonriiennies 125 Multifunction display 125 Multifunction steering wheel 126 U aa E AE 128 Standard display Menu 130 AUDIO MeNU cccseseceeeseeees 131 NAY IMM icicseccncwacrstatieurtonceeans 134 Vehicle status message memory OUD OT Vl EEE E E E senses 134 Settings MENU scccceseecceeeees 135 Trip computer MeNU 00008 150 TEL M Nu re
206. ent Keep the driver s footwell clear of all obsta cles If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals You could then no longer brake or accelerate Fastening the seat belt Warning A N Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women Failure to wear and properly fasten and po sition your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your passengers should always wear seat belts If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt The air bags can only provide the protection they were designed to afford if the occupants are using their seat belts gt page 67 Warning A N According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing position Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the re
207. er s authority to operate the equipment You can also open or close the power windows and the tilt sliding sunroof using the SmartKey see Summer opening feature gt page 241 and Convenience closing feature gt page 241 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Factory setting Global unlocking gt Press button Rg Your vehicle may be equipped with an e All turn signal lamps flash once acoustic lock and unlock confirmation signal feature If your vehicle is equipped with this feature and the fea e An acoustic signal sounds once if equipped and feature activated ture is activated an acoustic signal will e The locking knobs in the doors sound when the vehicle is locked or un move up locked using the SmartKey e The anti theft alarm system is dis To determine whether or not your vehi armed cle is equipped with this feature con The vehicle will lock again automatically tact an authorized Mercedes Benz and reactivate the anti theft alarm Center If equipped and you wish to ac system within approximately 40 seconds tivate or deactivate the feature or ad of unlocking if just its signal volume also contact an aahoried Mercedes Danz Center e neither a door nor the trunk is opened e the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter switch e the central locking switch is not activated Global locking gt Press button BAN All turn signal lamps flash three times An
208. er and tion pants and passengers cargo from placard 1 1500 Ibs 5 front 2 rear 3 2 1500 Ibs 3 front 1 rear 2 3 1500 Ibs 1 front 1 The higher the weight of all occupants the less cargo and luggage load capacity is available For more information see Trailer tongue load gt page 314 Occupants weight Occupant 1 Occupant 2 Occupant 3 Occupant 4 Occupant 5 Occupant 1 Occupant 2 Occupant 3 Occupant 1 150 Ibs 180 Ibs 160 Ibs 140 Ibs 120 Ibs 200 Ibs 190 Ibs 150 Ibs 150 Ibs Combined weight of all occupants 750 Ibs 540 Ibs 150 Ibs Operation Tires and wheels Available cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight total load limit or vehicle capacity weight from plac ard minus combined weight of all occupants 1500 Ibs 750 Ibs 750 Ibs 1500 Ibs 540 Ibs 960 Ibs 1500 Ibs 150 Ibs 1350 Ibs Operation Tires and wheels Certification label Even after careful determination of the combined weight of all occupants cargo and the trailer tongue load if applicable gt page 314 as to not exceed the permis sible load limit you must make sure that your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehi cle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for either the front or rear axle You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR from the Certification la bel The Certification Label can be found on the driver s door B pillar see Technical data
209. er be able to move upward when the easy entry exit feature is activated The adjustment procedure is briefly in terrupted when the engine is started Getting started Adjusting Warning A N Let the system complete the adjustment procedure before setting the vehicle in mo tion All steering wheel adjustments must be completed before setting the vehicle in mo tion Driving off with the steering wheel still adjusting could cause the driver to lose con trol of the vehicle Mirrors Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic condi tions Warning AX In case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks Electrolyte has an irritating effect Do not al low the liquid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or respiratory system In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water Interior rear view mirror gt Manually adjust the interior rear view mirror For more information see Rear view mir rors gt page 169 Exterior rear view mirrors Warning A N Exercise care when using the passen ger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex o
210. er keypad on the audio head unit gt Press OK soft key or button for dialing to begin DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection gt Wait until the emergency call center answers then describe the emergency Controls in detail Audio system Placing a 911 emergency call using audio head unit with the phone unlocked p gt Press button to switch to telephone operation gt Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit Press button for dialing to begin DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection Vv vy Wait until the emergency call center answers then describe the emergency Controls in detail Power windows Opening and closing the windows The side windows are opened and closed electrically The switches for all the side windows are on the driver s door The switches for the respective windows are on the front passenger door and the rear doors C Left front window 2 Right front window 3 Right rear window 4 Left rear window Rear window override switch gt page 80 Warning VAN When closing the power windows make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure The closing of the door windows can be im mediately halted by releasing the switch or if switch was pulled past the resistance point and released by either pressi
211. er sizable objects One wheel chock is included with the vehicle tool kit gt page 380 When changing wheel on a level surface gt Place the wheel chock in front of and another sizable object behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on a level surface However should cir cumstances require you to do so on a hill place the wheel chock and the other size able object as follows gt Place wheel chocks and another siz able object on the downhill side block ing both wheels of the axle not being worked on Warning A N The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle To help avoid personal injury use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised Be certain that the jack is always vertical plumb line when in use especially on hills Always try to use the jack on level surface Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take up bracket Al ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient ca pacity jackstands before working under the vehicle Practical hints Flat tire P40
212. er such conditions When the vehicle is in danger of skidding move gear selector lever to position N or in case of manual transmission declutch Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action For information on driving with snow chains see Snow chains gt page 337 Warning A N On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal braking effect Depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt strewn roads can bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to normal If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated roads the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed A Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers Warning A If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow make sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running Otherwise deadly carbon monox ide CO gases may enter vehicle interior re sulting in unconsciousness and death Warning To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation open a window slightly on the side of the
213. erator s Manual Hood open Remove key Replace key Drive to workshop Possible cause consequence A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky You are attempting to drive with the hood open You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey No additional code available for SmartKey Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Check the fuel cap gt page 293 If it is not closed properly gt Close the fuel cap If it is closed properly gt Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Close the hood gt page 297 gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch gt Change the SmartKey Practical hints What to do if Display symbol 10 r 1 Display message 3rd brake lamp Backup lamp left Backup lamp right Brake lamp Drive to workshop Brake lamp left Brake lamp right Display malfunction Visit workshop Front foglamp left Front foglamp right Front lett Side marker lamp Pomc yee Sider marker lamp Possible cause consequence The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working The left backup lamp is malfunctioning The right backup lamp is malfunctioning Brake lamp illumination is delayed or lamp is permanently on The left brake lamp i
214. erminated You are again connected with the caller previously placed on hold Combining two calls gt Press RM and buttons The calls are combined into one call Terminating a combined call gt Press button The connection to both callers is terminated TDMA or CDMA network phones Using your Mercedes Benz specified mobile telephone a number of functions and operating steps can be performed and displayed in the audio system display Further operating instructions not covered here can be found in the operating instruc tions for the multifunction steering wheel and the mobile telephone If your audio system is set up for telephone operation the symbol will appear in the display When you insert your Mercedes Benz specified mobile telephone into the telephone cradle you will be prompted to enter your PIN for 30 seconds gt page 229 This display disappears when you press any button When your mobile telephone is inserted into the telephone cradle you will see the reception strength in the upper right hand corner of the display Controls in detail Audio system Switching on the telephone Switching on the telephone gt Press button If you have programmed an unlock code for the telephone you must now enter the code P82 60 4469 31 Enter code using buttons EE to E If necessary correct number entered with the CLR soft key Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit enter
215. ervice More than 300000 different parts for Mercedes Benz models are available Genuine Mercedes Benz parts are subject to stringent quality inspections Each part has been specifically developed manufac tured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes Benz vehicles Therefore Genuine Mercedes Benz parts should be installed The use of non genuine Mercedes Benz parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes Benz could damage the vehicle which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or could compromise the vehicle s durability or safety Y Warranty coverage Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will ex change or repair any defective parts origi nally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties e New Vehicle Limited Warranty e Emission System Warranty e Emission Performance Warranty e California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes Benz Parts and Accessories warranties copies of which are available at any Mercedes Benz Center Technical data Warranty coverage Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet have an authorized Mercedes Benz Center arrange for a replacement It
216. es 00 305 Garage door Opener eeeee 273 Tire speed rating cccssesceseeees 288 Tire care and maintenance 306 Winter driving instructions 288 Direction of rotation eee 308 Standing Watel ccccecccccceeeeeeeeees 289 Loading the vehicle c008 308 Passenger compartment 290 Recommended tire inflation Driving abroad 290 PE SSUT sennoina 315 Control and operation of radio Checking tire inflation pressure 317 TRANISIMMUGT S cavancssunnccsnennsenderseronwers 290 Tire labeling shsdoasnetcnscenecescloaensteace 321 Catalytic CONVEFTEL cccceee 291 Load identification ccce 325 Emission control eeesseeceeseesceseen 291 DOT Tire Identification Number Coolant temperature 292 AE E E 326 Maximum tire load neeese 327 Maximum tire inflation pressure 328 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards U S vehicles 329 Tire ply material ccsccceeee 331 Tire and loading terminology 331 Rotating tires cccccsseeseneeees 335 Winter driving sissies oxsiensannkea necstnenondslcias 336 Winter tires scccsasenannsseanensevaanensecqon 336 Block heater Canada only 337 Snow CHAINS siscanrserensansenasssvndsnaees 337 Maintenance cccssccsesseeceeseceeees 338 Maintenance service indicator VOSS AO 6 sessin 338 Calling up the maintenance service Indicator dis
217. es Combination switch 1 Turn signals right 2 Turn signals left Getting started Driving Windshield wipers T Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry Dust that accumulates on a windshield might scratch the glass and or damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry windshield If it is necessary to op erate the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions always operate the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid gt page 51 The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Switching on windshield wipers gt Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the C Single wipe tv of Wiping with windshield washer fluid ne Or TEM 2 Switching on windshield wipers O Windshield wipers off gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 Intermittent wiping Il Normal wiper speed Ill Fast wiper speed Intermittent wiping Vehicles with rain sensor Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning Windshield wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on the windshield and windshield wipers may be damaged as a result Vehicles with rain sensor If you have set intermittent wiping dirt on the surface of the rain sensor or op tical effects may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an undesired fashion This
218. es Benz ap proved Tire Care and Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care products take care not to spray them on the brake disks Plastic and rubber parts gt Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution Do not use oil or wax on these parts Instrument cluster and cup holders gt Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution gt Wipe with a cloth moistened in a luke warm solution To prevent scratches do not use scour ing agents Hard plastic trim items gt Use Mercedes Benz approved Interior Care a soft lint free cloth and apply with light pressure To prevent scratches do not use scour ing agents Steering wheel and gear selector lever gt Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thor oughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care Carpets gt Use Mercedes Benz approved Carpet and Fabric Care for cleaning the car pets Headliner and shelf below rear window gt Use a soft bristle brush or a dry sham poo cleaner in case of excessive dirt Seat belts gt Only use clear lukewarm water and soap The webbing must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above 176 F 80 C or in direct sunlight A Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Warning
219. espect to its disposal Have the engine oil checked Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display messages B 4 Engine oil level Visit workshop Oil sensor malfunction Visit workshop When the message At next gas station add 1 0 qt engine oil Canada 1 0 1 appears while the engine Is running and at operating temperature the engine oil level has dropped to approximately the mini mum level Possible cause consequence The engine oil has dropped to a critical level Possible solution gt Check the engine oil level gt page 299 and add oil as required gt page 300 gt If you must add engine oil frequently have the engine checked for possible leaks The measuring system is malfunctioning Have the measuring system checked When this occurs the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further Visually check for oil leaks If no obvious oil leaks are noted drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be topped to the required level with an approved oil specified in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Display symbol Display message Check gas cap See Op
220. essure of the collapsible tire differs from the tire inflation pressure of the road tires Inflate the collapsible tire to approxi mately 51 psi 3 5 bar Technical data Electrical system Model Generator alternator Starter motor Battery Spark plugs Electrode gap Tightening torque C 55 AMG 14V 150A 14 V 1 7 kW 12 V 100 Ah NGK ILFR 6 A 0 031 in 0 8 mm 18 22 lb ft 25 30 Nm Vv Main dimensions and weights Main dimensions Model C 55 AMG Overall vehicle length 181 8 in 4617 mm Overall vehicle width exterior rear 77 8 in 1977 mm view mirrors folded out Overall vehicle height 55 6 in 1412 mm Wheelbase 106 9 in 2715 mm Track front 59 3 in 1507 mm Track rear 58 0 in 1474 mm Weights Roof load max 220 Ibs 100 kg Trunk load max 220 Ibs 100 kg Technical data Main dimensions and weights Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Capacities Vehicle components and their respective Engine with oil filter Automatic transmission Rear axle Power steering Front wheel hubs Brake system Cooling system Fuel tank including a reserve of Air conditioning system Windshield washer Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system lubricants must match Therefore only use Please refer to the Factory Approved products tested and approved by Mercedes Benz Capacity 9 0 US qt 8 5 I 9 3 US qt 8 7 I 1 5 US qt 1 4 I
221. ethods can be employed If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised the engine must be shut off SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 Otherwise the ESP will immedi ately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes Practical hints Towing the vehicle When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground the gear selector lever must be in position N and the SmartKey must be in starter switch position 2 When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground or the front axle raised the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles 50 km and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the drivetrain however we recommend the drive shaft be discon nected at the rear axle drive flange for any towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage Practical hints Towing the vehicle Warning A N If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground always tow with a tow bar if e the engine will not run e there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle s electrical system as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground make sure the SmartKey is in starter switch position 2 If the SmartKey is left in starter switch position O for an extended period of time it can no longer be turned in the switch In this case the
222. event the build up of carbon deposits After an extended period of using fuels without such additives carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area leading to engine performance problems such as e Warm up hesitation e Unstable idle e Knocking pinging e Misfire e Power loss In areas where carbon deposits may be encountered due to lack of availability of gasolines which contain these additives Mercedes Benz recommends the use of additives approved by us for use on Mercedes Benz vehicles Refer to Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet for a listing of approved product s Follow directions on product label Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel This only results in unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation Damage or malfunction resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives other than those tested and approved by us for use on Mercedes Benz vehicles listed in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Fuel requirements Only use premium unleaded fuel e The octane number posted at the pump must be 91 min It is an average of both the Research R octane num ber and the Motor M octane number R M 2 This is also Known as the ANTI KNOCK INDEX Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol IPA IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any o
223. ffic Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the passenger or cargo compartment unless they are firmly secured in place For more in formation see Loading gt page 248 and Useful features gt page 256 Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child s risk of injury in the event of e strong braking maneuvers e sudden changes of direction e anaccident Infant and child restraint systems Only use a BabySmart compatible child restraint for the front passenger seat in this vehicle We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion All lap shoulder belts except the driver s seat belt have special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints To fasten a child restraint follow child restraint instructions for mounting Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract During seat belt retraction a ratcheting sound can be heard to indi cate that the special seat belt retractor is activated The belt is now locked Push down on child restraint to take up any Slack Safety and Security Occupant safety To deactivate release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner A Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated Warning For information on c
224. fic conditions permit Always pay full attention to traffic conditions first before operating system controls while driving Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your car is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Operating safety Warning A N Any alterations made to electronic components can cause malfunctions The radio amplifier CD changer satellite radio and telephone are interconnected When one of the components is not opera tional or has not been removed replaced properly the function of other components may be impaired This condition might seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle We recommend that you have any service work on electronic components carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Controls in detail Audio system _ Audio system Operating and display elements RADIO MUTE 4 Prats T CD Dem P SEEK SEEKt 6f se lesa DEF om ae GHI MNO iira m j 1 0 D 1 PAZ 60 4555 31 Item CD changer mode selector AUX mode selector Single CD mode selector Radio mode selector Mute function radio Pause CD Volume distribution Sound settings Display Alphanumeric keypad Page 214 205 218 208 222 203 201 Item Speed dialing memory telephone in descending order Accepting a call
225. ficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle Practical hints Where will I find Setting up the collapsible wheel chock The collapsible wheel chock serves to 7 OF f additionally secure the vehicle e g while A m l _ changing the wheel P40 10 277 74 31 gt Turn crank handle clockwise Before storing the vehicle jack in its compartment e t should be fully collapsed e The handle must be folded in storage position P40 10 2776 31 1 Tilt the plate upward 2 Fold the lower plate outward 3 Insert the plate gt Tilt both plates upward Q Fold the lower plate outward 2 Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way into the openings of the base plate 3 Spare wheel The spare wheel with collapsible tire is lo cated in the storage compartment under neath the trunk floor gt Lift up trunk floor cover and engage trunk floor handle in upper edge of trunk 1 Spare wheel with collapsible tire 2 Vehicle tool kit under collapsible tire 3 Retaining screw Removing the spare wheel gt Loosen retaining screw 3 by turning it counterclockwise gt Remove spare wheel Q Storing the spare wheel If you wish to store the spare wheel after use carry out the following steps Otherwise the spare wheel will not fit the storage compartment Make sure the spare wheel is dry when storing it gt Unscrew the valve cap from the val
226. ficiently charged in order to achieve its rated service life Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery maintenance intervals If you use your vehicle mostly for short distance trips you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently When replacing the battery always use batteries approved by Mercedes Benz If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time consult an authorized Mercedes Benz Center about steps you need to observe Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries Risk of explosion Keep flames or sparks away from battery Do not smoke Battery acid is caustic Do not allow it to come into contact with skin eyes or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with clean water and seek medical help if necessary Operation Engine compartment Wear eye protection Keep children away Follow the instructions in this Operator s Manual 6 Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling Operation Engine compartment Windshield washer system and During all seasons add MB Windshield T headlamp cleaning system Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit to Only use washer fluid which is suitable water Premix the w
227. g battery condition 98 Battery Vehicle 303 411 Charging 413 Disconnecting and connecting 412 Jump starting 415 Removing and installing 412 Bead 331 Bi Xenon headlamps see headlamps Block heater Canada only 337 Bolts Spare wheel 385 Brake Assist System see BAS Brake fluid 437 Checking 295 Message in display 366 Brake lamps Cleaning lenses 344 Messages in display 374 Replacing bulbs 400 Brake pads Message in display 366 Brakes 284 Warning lamp 25 351 Break in period 282 Bulbs replacing see Replacing bulbs C CAC 443 California retail buyers and lessees important notice 11 CAN system 444 Cargo area see Trunk Cargo tie down rings 255 Carpets cleaning 346 Catalytic converter 291 CD changer 214 CD player 132 214 Centigrade see Temperature display mode 137 Central locking Automatic 103 147 From inside 104 Locking unlocking from inside 104 Switch 104 Certification label 426 Charcoal filter Automatic climate control Canada only 193 Children in the vehicle 72 Air bags 62 Blocking rear door window operation 80 Indicator lamp front passenger air bag 75 357 Infant and child restraint systems 73 LATCH type child seat anchors 79 Cigarette lighter 262 Climate control system 174 Control panel 175 Defrosting Front 179 Rear window defroster 173 Clock 25 125 Setting time Cockpit 22 444 140 141 Cockpit Management and Data System see COMAND Cold tire inflation pressure 331 Collapsible t
228. ge Bar Another metric unit for air pressure There are 14 5038 pounds per square inch psi to 1 bar there are 100 kilopascal kPa to 1 bar Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Cold tire inflation pressure Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than one mile 1 6 km Operation Tires and wheels Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maxi mum capacity of fuel oil and coolant and if so equipped air conditioning and additional optional equipment but without passengers and cargo DOT Department of Transportation A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U S Department of Transportation GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight The gross vehicle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the Certification label located on the driver s door B pillar GVW Gross Vehicle Weight The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel tools spare wheel installed accessories passengers and cargo and if applicable trailer tongue load The GVW must never exceed the GVWR indicated on the Certification label located on the driver s door B pillar GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating This is the maximum permis
229. ges that may appear in the multifunction display For your convenience the messages are divided into two sections e Text messages gt page 360 e Symbol messages gt page 365 Practical hints What to do if Text messages Display message ABS malfunction Visit workshop Display malfunction Visit workshop Possible cause consequence The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off The ESP BAS and the Run Flat Indicator are also deactivated The brake system is still functioning normally but without the systems speci fied above The ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning Possible solution gt Continue driving with added caution Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident gt Continue driving with added caution Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident Display message ESP unavailable See Operator s Manual Possible cause consequence The ESP was deactivated because of a malfunction or interrupted power supply The BAS and the Run Flat Indicator are also deactivated The ABS might not be o
230. h an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the seat belt telltale illu minates continuously Possible cause consequence The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts before driving off You and or your front passenger have for gotten to fasten your seat belts There are items placed on the front passen ger seat and therefore the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied You and or your front passenger have for gotten to fasten your seat belts There are items placed on the front passen ger seat and therefore the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied The seat belt telltale will only go out if both the driver and front passenger s seat belt are fastened or the vehicle is standing still and a front door is opened Practical hints What to do if Suggested solution gt Fasten your seat belts The seat belt telltale goes out gt Fasten your seat belts gt Remove the items from the front pas senger seat and put them in a safe place gt Fasten your seat belts gt Remove the items from the front pas senger seat and put them in a safe place Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution E The red SRS indicator lamp comes There is a malfunction in the restraint gt Drive with added caution to the near on while driving systems The air bags or emergenc
231. h the SmartKey removed and the unlocking gt page 94 driver s door open a warning sounds if the vehicle s exterior lamps are not switched off The message Switch off lights ap pears in the multifunction display Exit the vehicle and close all doors gt After exiting the vehicle press the lock button on the SmartKey gt page 32 e All turn signal lamps flash three times e An acoustic signal sounds three times if equipped and feature acti vated For more information see Factory setting gt page 96 e The locking knobs in the doors move down e The anti theft alarm system is armed Getting started Parking and locking Safety and Security Occupant safety Panic alarm Driving safety systems Anti theft systems Safety and Security Occupant safety In this section you will learn the most im portant facts about the restraint systems of the vehicle The restraint systems are e Seat belts e Emergency tensioning device e Air bags e Child seats e Child seat recognition e Lower anchors and tethers for children LATCH As independent systems their protective effects work in conjunction with each other For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children see Children in the vehicle gt page 72 The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster gt page 24
232. haracteristics for which you may not be prepared The last selected program mode C or S is switched on when the engine is restarted gt Controls in detail Automatic transmission Press program mode selector switch Q repeatedly until the letter of the desired program mode appears in the multifunction display Select C for comfort driving e The vehicle starts out in second gear both forward and reverse for gentler starts This does not apply if full throttle is applied or gear range 1 is selected e Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads e Upshifts occur earlier even when you give more gas The engine then operates at lower rpms and the wheels are less likely to spin Controls in detail Automatic transmission Gear selector lever one touch gearshifting Even with an automatic transmission you can change the gears manually and limit or extend the gear range for automatic shift ing with the gear selector lever in position D and driving in the automatic program mode C or S Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Be
233. hat the head re straint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an ac cident or similar situation Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident You cannot remove the active head re straints on the driver s and passengers seat For removal of the active head restraints we recommend that you contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center that it is as close to the head as possible For information on head restraint adjustment see Seats gt page 35 For information on active head restraints see Active head restraint gt page 71 Adjust the head restraint in such a way Rear seat head restraints Warning A N For safety reasons always drive with the rear head restraints in the upright position when the rear seats are occupied Keep the area around head restraints clear of articles e g clothing to not obstruct the folding operation of the head restraints Head restraint height rear outer seats 1 Release button Raising gt Manually adjust the height of the head restraint by pulling it upward If the head restraint is fully retracted push release button Q and pull the head restraint out Lowering gt To lower the head restraint push release button Q and push down on the head restraint
234. he CD changer are Class 1 laser products There is a danger of invisible laser radiation if the housing is opened or damaged Do not open the housing The single CD player and the CD changer do not contain any parts that can be serviced by the user For safety reasons have any service work which may be necessary performed only by qualified personnel Warning A N In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an accident the driver should insert CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the audio system only if permitted by road weather and traffic conditions Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your car covers a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second General notes The system may not be able to play audio CDs with copy protection Playing copied CDs may cause malfunctions during playback If you affix stickers to the CDs they can become warped due to the heat that develops in the CD drive or CD changer In certain situations the CDs can then no longer be ejected and cause damage to the drive Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Your CD drive or CD changer has been designed to play CDs which correspond to the EN 60908 standard You can therefore only use CDs with a maximum thickness of 1 3 mm If you insert thicker data carriers e g ones that have data on both sides one side with DVD data the other side with audio da
235. he bulb counterclockwise and remove it gt Press gently onto the bulb and turn it counterclockwise out of bulb socket 8 gt Press new bulb gently into bulb socket 3 and turn clockwise until it engages p gt Place bulb socket back into the lamp and turn it clockwise Parking and standing lamp bulb gt Press the clamp on housing cover 2 and remove it Pull out bulb socket G with the bulb Pull the bulb out of bulb socket vY v vy Yy Press bulb socket back into the lamp gt Align housing cover 2 and press until it engages Press the new bulb into bulb socket Additional turn signal lamp bulbs The additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors have LEDs If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to func tion the entire turn signal unit must be re placed Have the turn signal unit replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Front side marker lamp bulbs Since replacing the side marker lamp bulbs is a technically highly demanding process we recommend you have the side marker lamp bulbs replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Replacing bulbs for rear lamps Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear lamp do the following first gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position W gt page 114 gt Open the trunk gt page 99 Tail lamp unit PBT 10 3052 31 1 Latch gt Fold the corresponding trim panel to the side gt Turn l
236. he passen ger door e Front passenger seat backrest and head restraint position A Do not activate the memory function while driving Activating the memory function while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Warning Controls in detail Memory function The memory button and memory position switch are located on the door P54 25 2950 31 C Memory button 2 Memory position switch gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 or gt Open the respective door Storing positions into memory gt Adjust the seat steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors to the desired position gt page 35 Turn memory position switch 2 to the desired memory position Press memory button 1 Release memory button Q and press memory position switch 2 within 3 seconds All settings are stored to the selected position Recalling positions from memory Do not operate the power seats using the memory button if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined position Doing so could cause damage to front or rear seats Turn memory position switch 2 to the desired memory position Press and hold memory position switch 2 until the seat steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors have completely moved to the stored positions a Releasing the memory position switch stops movement to the stored positions immediately Storing exterior rear view mirror parking
237. hild seats with an chor fittings for tether anchorages see Installation of infant and child re straint systems gt page 77 For information on child seat anchors LATCH type gt page 79 Safety and Security Occupant safety The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states the District of Columbia the U S territo ries and all Canadian provinces Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured by a lap shoulder belt or if so equipped a child restraint lower anchorage system that complies with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210 2 A statement by the child restraint man ufacturer of compliance with this stan dard can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint When using any infant or child restraint system be sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer s instructions for installation and use Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant or child restraints Warning A N Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat except in a Mercedes Benz authorized BabySmart compatible child seat which operates with the BabySmart system installed in the ve hicle to deactivate the passenger front air
238. hl Risk of accident If the ESP cannot be switched back on have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road weather and traffic conditions The yellow ESP warning lamp The ESP or traction control has come into When driving off apply as little flashes while driving operation because of detected traction loss throttle as possible in at least one tire gt While driving ease up on the accelerator gt Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions gt Do not deactivate the ESP Exceptions gt page 84 Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident The yellow fuel tank reserve The fuel level has gone below the reserve gt Refuel at the next gas station warning lamp in the fuel gauge mark gt page 293 gt page 24 comes on while driving Problem CY The red seat belt telltale comes on and a warning chime sounds for approximately 6 seconds af ter starting the engine with all doors closed The red seat belt telltale remains illuminated after driving off The vehicle s speed does not exceed 15 mph 25 km h The red seat belt telltale flashes and you additionally hear an in termittent warning signal with in creasing intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 25 km h After 60 seconds wit
239. i B for previous display ca 3 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume Press button up to increase E down to decrease Vv Center console Upper part So OE Item Seat heating driver s side Rear window sunshade switch ESP control switch Hazard warning flasher switch switching on off Central locking switch Central unlocking switch Switch for folding back rear seat head restraints Tow away alarm switch if equipped Anti theft alarm system indicator lamp Page 110 172 84 iy 104 104 108 90 89 At a glance Center console Item Seat heating passenger side Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp Audio system or COMAND see separate operating instructions Climate control Automatic climate control Canada only Rear window defroster Page 110 79 357 197 174 184 is At a glance Center console Lower part Ashtray Cigarette lighter Gear selector lever for automatic transmission Cup holder Armrest Program mode selector switch for automatic transmission At a glance Overhead control panel Y Overhead control panel Item Page Rear interior lighting on off 121 2 Power tilt sliding sunroof 242 Right reading lamp on off 121 Interior lighting control 120 Interior rear view mirror 40 169 Hands free microphone for 132 Tele Aid emergency call 223 sy
240. ic transmission An additional indication of the current gear T selector lever position can be found on the Allow engine to warm up under low cover of the shifting gate load use Do not place full load on the The indicators come on when you activate engine until the operating temperature a switch e g unlocking the vehicle or has been reached opening a door and go out after approxi Shift into reverse gear R or parking mately 15 minutes position P only when the vehicle is stopped Warning A Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an Current gear range gear selector lever extended period when driving off on position It is dangerous to shift the gear selector slippery road surfaces This may cause 2 Current program mode vero en E oi DA I de Aaii specie Is serious damage to the drivetrain which higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty The current gear range gear selector lever position and program mode M C S appear in the multifunction display When the gear selector lever is in position D you can influence transmission shifting by e limiting the gear range e
241. ical hints Replacing bulbs P82 10 3579 31 3 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb 4 Bulb socket for low beam bulb Bulb socket for high beam bulb 6 Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp bulb Practical hints Replacing bulbs Low beam bulb gt Press the clamp on housing cover and remove it Pull the electrical connector off Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and take out the bulb Insert the new bulb so that its socket locates in the recess of the lamp housing Turn bulb socket clockwise until it engages Plug the electrical connector onto the bulb Align housing cover 1 and press until it engages High beam bulb gt Press the clamp on housing cover 2 and remove it Pull the electrical connector off Turn bulb socket G counterclockwise and take out the bulb Insert the new bulb so that its socket locates in the recess of the lamp housing Turn bulb socket clockwise until it engages Plug the electrical connector onto the bulb Align housing cover 2 and press until it engages Front turn signal lamp bulb gt Turn bulb socket with the bulb counterclockwise and remove it Press gently onto the bulb and turn it counterclockwise out of bulb socket Press new bulb gently into bulb socket 3 and turn clockwise until it engages Place bulb socket 3 back into the lamp and turn it clockwise Parking and standing lamp
242. icator lamp on the button comes on The air recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside tempera tures The indicator lamp on the button is not lit when the air recirculation mode is automatically switched on A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes Controls in detail Automatic climate control Canada only Deactivating i I Warning gt Press button gt page 185 again A Press and hold button for approx Never operate the side windows and the tilt sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure In the event that the closing procedure causes potential danger the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by pressing or pulling the respective window switch The closing of the tilt sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by moving the tilt sliding sunroof switch in the overhead control panel in any direction The closing of the side windows and tilt sliding sunroof can be reversed by again pressing and holding the button Ey 2 seconds The side windows and tilt sliding sunroof will close You can release button once the closing procedure has begun The windows and tilt sliding sunroof continue clos ing until they are fully closed The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air recirculation mode is deactivat ed automatically e after 5 minutes if the outside tem pera
243. icle should now be locked pare Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency Manually unlocking the transmission gt Insert a tool Q e g flat blade screw gear selector lever driver into the opening Perform the following two steps In case of power failure the transmission simultaneously gear selector lever can be manually un locked e g to tow the vehicle gt Press tool Q forward in the gt Slide out the swiveling cup holder direction OF the arrow gt page 259 gt Move gear selector lever from position P Remove tool Q from the opening The gear selector lever is locked again when moving it to position P 1 Locking gt Insert the mechanical key into the driver s door lock until it stops gt Turn the mechanical key clockwise to position Q The driver s door is locked Practical hints Opening closing in an emergency Y Opening closing in an emergency Power tilt sliding sunroof You can open or close the tilt sliding sunroof manually should an electrical malfunction occur The tilt sliding sunroof drive is located behind the lens A of the interior overhead light Tr P68 00 3102 31 f YY P68 00 3103 31 2 Locking tabs 3 Crank gt Slide both locking tabs 2 in direction Insert crank through hole on the left of the arrows side gt Lower the rear of the cover and gt Turn crank 3 clockwise to remove e slide sunro
244. icle is centrally unlocked You can only cancel the separate trunk locking mode by means of the mechanical key gt Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid lock gt Turn the mechanical key counterclock wise to neutral position Q and remove the mechanical key in that position to unlock the trunk You can now open the trunk gt page 99 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Automatic central locking The doors and the trunk automatically lock when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h or more You can open a locked door from the inside Open door only when conditions are safe to do so The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking deactivate the automatic central locking when the vehicle e is pushed or towed e is ona test stand You can deactivate the automatic locking mode using the control system see Set automatic locking gt page 147 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Locking and unlocking from the inside The switches are located in the center console You can open a locked door from the inside Open door only when conditions are safe to do so You can lock or unlock the doors and the trunk from inside using the central locking or unlocking switch This can be
245. icrophone 29 Hard plastic trim items cleaning 346 Hazard warning flasher 119 Head restraints 106 Active head restraint 71 Front seat Removing and installing 106 Power seat Adjusting 37 Rear seat Folding back 107 Rear seat Removing and installing 108 Resetting activated head restraints 391 Head unit Time synchronization with 140 Headlamp cleaning system 169 304 436 Headlamp shut off delay see Delayed shut off Exterior lamps Headlamps Automatic headlamp mode 115 Bi Xenon 399 443 Cleaning lenses 344 Halogen 397 High beam see High beam flasher High beam see High beam headlamps Low beam see Low beam headlamps Manual headlamp mode 115 Messages in display 374 375 376 Replacing bulbs 394 Switch 48 55 Headliner and shelf below rear window Cleaning and care of 347 Heated seats 110 High beam flasher 49 118 High beam headlamps 49 118 Indicator lamp 25 Messages in display 375 Replacing bulbs 395 398 High mounted brake lamp 396 Hood 297 Message indisplay 373 Horn 23 HVAC see Climate control Hydroplaning 287 l Identification labels 426 Identification number Vehicle VIN Ignition 33 46 Immobilizer 88 Indicator lamps see Lamps indicator and warning Infant and child restraint systems see Children in the vehicle Inflation pressure see Tires Inflation pressures Inside door handle 99 Instrument and controls see Instrument cluster 426 Instrument cluster 24 122 445 Cleaning 346 I
246. id damaging the uphol stery Press the reset tool forward in the di rection of the arrow gt Press reset tool downward until you hear the head restraint release mechanism audibly engage Pull out reset tool Firmly press the head restraint cushion back toward the rear head restraint cover until it engages Warning A N When pushing back the head restraint cush ion take care that your fingers do not be come caught between the head restraint cushion and the cover Failing to do so may lead to injury gt Repeat this procedure on the active head restraint for the second seat For information on active head restraints see Active head restraint gt page 71 For information on head restraint adjust ment see Seats gt page 35 Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries If the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A N Keep the batteries out of reach of children If a battery is swallowed seek medical help immediately Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling When inserting the batteries make sure they are clean and free of lint
247. iding in your vehicle Operation Tires and wheels Step 3 gt Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilo grams or XXX lbs Step 4 gt The resulting figure equals the avail able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ibs passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs Step 5 gt Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 b gt Operation Tires and wheels gt gt Step 6 if applicable gt If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle gt page 314 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configura tions and number and size of occupants The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs This is for illustration purposes only Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle s placard gt page 309 Example Combined Numberof Seating weight limit occupants configura of occu driv
248. iefly push the cruise control lever to position G Cruise control is canceled The last speed set is stored for later use Moving the gear selector lever to position N while driving also cancels cruise control However the gear selector lever should not be moved to position N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads The last stored speed is canceled when you turn off the engine Setting a higher speed gt Lift cruise control lever to position Q and hold it up until the desired speed is reached gt Release cruise control lever The new speed is set Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate cruise control After brief acceleration e g for passing cruise control will resume the last speed set Setting a lower speed gt Depress cruise control lever to position 2 and hold it down until the desired speed is reached gt Release cruise control lever The new speed is set When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate the transmission will automatically downshift if the engine s braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently Fine adjustment in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments Faster gt Briefly tip cruise control lever in direction of arrow Q Slower gt Briefly tip cruise control lever in direction of arrow Controls in detail Driving systems Setting to last stored speed Resume
249. ight against the armrest when it is folded down as you could otherwise damage it gt Pull handle and swing cover 2 down 1 Handle 2 Cover 3 Armrest Controls in detail Loading 4 Hook and loop fastener p gt Unfasten hook and loop fastener 4 gt Pull ski sack into passenger compart ment and unfold b gt Controls in detail Loading Button gt From trunk slide skis into ski sack Strap gt Open trunk lid gt Press button Warning A N end arrow until the skis in the ski sack are tightly secured gt Tighten strap by pulling at the loose The flap opens downward The ski sack is designed for up to four pairs of skis Do not load the ski sack with other objects Always fasten the ski sack securely In an accident an unfastened ski sack can cause injury to vehicle occupants 7 Hook Eye gt Connect hook 7 to eye 8 Tighten strap by pulling at the loose end arrow Unloading and folding vY Vv V V y Yy viv Loosen the straps Disconnect hook 7 from eye 8 Unload skis Close flap in trunk Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise Place folded ski sack inside recess of backrest Fasten hook and loop fastener Close ski sack compartment cover Controls in detail Loading Removing the ski sack You can remove the ski sack for cleaning or drying 1 Button 2 Ski sack frame 3 Flap gt gt
250. ill brake a spinning wheel the ESP continues to operate when you are braking i When the ESP is switched off and one or more drive wheels are spinning the ESP warning lamp in the speed ometer flashes However the ESP will then not stabilize the vehicle The switch is located on the upper part of the center console gt 1 ESP switc a h off on With the engine running Press switch Q The ESP warning lamp in the speedometer comes on The ESP is deactivated Switching on the ESP Warning gt AN gt Press ESP switch Q When the ESP warning lamp is The ESP warning lamp in the illuminated continuously the ESP is speedometer goes out switched off DE You are now again in normal driving Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail mode with the ESP switched on ing road conditions and to the non operating status of the ESP EJ Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period with the ESP switched off This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Safety and Security Driving safety systems Safety and Security Anti theft systems Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle Activating gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Deactivating gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 Starting the engine wil
251. ime gt page 147 If the door remains open the interior lamps switch off automatically after approximately 5 minutes when the SmartKey is removed or in starter switch position 0 An interior lamp switched on manually does not go out automatically Manual control Switching front rear interior lights on and off gt Press the symbol on rocker switch 8 or the rear interior light switch to switch on the desired interior light gt Press the rocker switch to center position or the rear interior light switch Q again to switch off the respective interior light Switching front reading lamp on and off gt Press front reading lamp switch or 4 to switch on the desired front reading lamp gt Press front reading lamp switch 2 or 4 again to switch off the respective front reading lamp Door entry lamps For better orientation in the dark the cor responding front door entry lamps will switch on in darkness when you open a front door and the automatic control is ac tivated The door entry lamps will switch off when the corresponding door is closed If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position O and switch off the exterior headlamps the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately 5 minutes Controls in detail Lighting Trunk lamp The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk is opened If the trunk remains open the trunk light ing switches off auto
252. indshield washer fluid The windshield washer reservoir is located in a suitable container in the engine compartment Warning IN For more information see Windshield Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flamma washer and headlamp cleaning system ble Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze gt page 442 on hot engine parts because it may ignite and burn You could be seriously burned for plastic lenses Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps gt Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water or commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze Fluid for the windshield washer system and depending on ambient temperatures the headlamp cleaning system is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir It has a capacity of Always use washer solvent antifreeze where temperatures may fall below the l l l freezing point Failure to do so could e 3 2 US qt 3 0 I in vehicles without result in damage to the washer headlamp cleaning system system reservoir e 6 4 US gt 6 0 I in vehicles with headlamp cleaning system YV Tires and wheels See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase Warning A N Replace rims or tires with the same designa tion manufacturer and type as shown on the
253. ings To reset gt Press button BVA or EN ne eet The stored messages will now be button displayed in the order in which they for 3 sec have occurred For malfunction and warning messages see Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display gt page 358 ae P54 32 2358 31 Controls in detail Control system Resetting all settings i You can reset all the functions of all _ The settings you have changed will not settings submenus to the factory settings be reset unless you confirm the action gt Press the reset bution in the aprh earm e e A soins instrument cluster gt page 122 for eas PP y i e i the Settings menu reappears in the Lighting approximately 3 seconds multifunction display gt The request to press the reset button once more to confirm appears in the multifunction display For safety reasons the following function are not reset while driving e the Hdlamp mode function in the gt Press button Sg Lighting submenu P54 392 2359 31 The selection marker moves to the next submenu in th BUDE ne HEE Series MENU The submenus are arranged by hierarchy gt Press button a Scroll down with button JS scroll up The collection of the submenus with button BE appears in the multifunction display With the selection marker on the desired submenu use the button JK to access Font eee the individual functions within that sub gt Press the reset button once mo
254. inopera tive or causing unintended air bag deploy ment Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians Con tact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Air bags Warning A N Air bags are designed to reduce the poten tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts front air bags or side impacts front side impact air bags rear side impact air bags and head protection window cur tain air bags However no system available today can totally eliminate injuries and fatal ities The activation of the air bags temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the air bags This dust however is neither inju rious to your health nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for peo ple with asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or door Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning VAN To reduce the risk of injury when the front air bags inflate it is very important for the driver and front passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear your seat belts For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the backrest Fasten your seat
255. ion gt Slide changer door to the right and press WW button Magazine will be ejected P82 60 3772 31 CD 2 CD changer 3 CD tray 4 CD magazine Remove magazine and pull CD tray fully out Place CD in recess of tray label side up Push tray into magazine in direction of arrow CDs which have been inserted improperly or are unreadable will not be played Push magazine into CD changer 2 in direction of arrow and close sliding door Controls in detail Audio system Playing CDs Single CD player in the audio unit p gt Press button CD 0 will appear in the upper left hand corner of the display The CD will resume playback at the point where it was switched off CD changer gt Press button CD and the selected magazine slot number appear in the upper left hand corner of the display If you have not removed a CD since the last time the CD audio source was activated the last CD listened to will begin to play at the point where it was switched off After the last track on a CD has finished the next CD is automatically played Controls in detail Audio system Playing tracks You have the following options Selecting CDs in the audio unit with CD changer Audio system with CD changer selecting CDs EDI Direct track entry Track skip forward reverse RDM RPT Fast forward reverse EE SI scan gt You c
256. ion can be seen in vehicles with audio system or in vehicles with COMAND if the time synchronization with head unit feature was set to Off Vehicles with COMAND For information on setting the time refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions gt Move the selection marker with button or SH to the Time Date submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until the message Time Hours appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the hour setting Time Hours D mm 30 AM D P54 32 3185 31 gt Press button or E to set the hour Set the time minutes This function can be seen in vehicles with audio system or in vehicles with COMAND if the time synchronization with head unit feature was set to Off Vehicles with COMAND For information on setting the time refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions gt Move the selection marker with button or SH to the Time Date submenu gt Press button EAN or Re repeatedly until the message Time Minutes appears in the multifunction display Controls in detail Control system The selection marker is on the minute setting Time Minutes D 1o amp f aM P54 32 3186 31 gt Press button or E to set the minutes Controls in detail Control system Select automatic time change Daylight Saving Time DST summer Standard time winter This fun
257. ion you can find us on the Mercedes Benz web site www mbusa com or www mercedes benz ca Warning A To help avoid personal injury be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment which may in turn result in personal injury If you have questions about carrying out any type of service turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes Benz Center We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator s Manual Reprinting translation and copying even of excerpts is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing Press time November 08 2005 GSP TIP Printed in Germany
258. ions You can also operate the radio in the usual manner 1 Waveband setting 2 Station frequency Controls in detail Control system Select satellite radio station USA only The satellite radio is treated as a radio application gt Select satellite radio with the corresponding soft key SAT in the radio menu SAT gt ED THEPULSE ae 1 SAT mode and preset number 2 Channel name or number gt Press button BV or EAN repeatedly until the desired channel is found P54 32 d182 31 For more information on satellite radio operation see Introduction to satellite radio USA only gt page 209 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate operating Instructions Operate the CD player ap The COMAND system and the CD changer can play audio CDs as well as CDs with MP3 files Selecting CD track gt Turn on the radio and select CD or CD changer gt page 219 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate operating instructions gt Press button or repeatedly until the settings for the CD currently being played appear in the multifunction display P54 392 2352 31 1 Current CD for CD changer 2 Current track gt Press button BV or EAN repeatedly until the desired track is selected To select a CD from the CD changer magazine press a number on the audio system or the COMAND system key pad located in the center dashboard For m
259. ior rear view mirror parking position gt page 170 gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Convenience submenu gt Controls in detail Control system Press button BeN or Ref repeatedly until the message Mirror set parking aid appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Mirror set parking aig D On D P 4 32 2387 31 gt Press button or E to switch function On or Off Controls in detail Control system Trip computer menu Fuel consumption statistics after start T All statistics stored since the last Use the trip computer menu to call up e Outan z or rep oateay i i E i until the first function of the trip engine start will be reset approximately statistical data on your vehicle l l computer menu appears in the 4 hours after the SmartKey in the The following information is available multifunction display starter switch is turned to position O or removed from the starter switch Function Page gt Press button JM or ed repeatedly Fuel consumption statistics after 150 until the Na AR orarL appears NE ee i nou ne Stare in the multifunction display SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time period Fuel consumption statistics 151 since last reset Distance to empty 151 romi T 1 30 h 50 Mph 3 21 4 mpg After start P54 32 2389 31 1 Distance driven since start 2 Time elapse
260. ir bags are designed to activate only in certain frontal impacts front air bags and in side impacts front side impact air bags rear side impact air bags and head protection window curtain air bags which exceed preset thresholds Only during these types of impacts if of sufficient severity to meet the deploy ment tresholds will they provide their supplemental protection The driver and passengers should always wear their seat belts Otherwise it is not possible for air bags to provide their supplemental protection Safety and Security Occupant safety In cases of other frontal impacts angled impacts roll overs other side impacts rear collisions or other acci dents the air bags will not be activat ed The driver and passengers will then be protected by the fastened seat belts We caution you not to rely on the presence of the air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt Your vehicle was originally equipped with air bags that are designed to acti vate in certain impacts exceeding a preset threshold to reduce the poten tial and severity of injury It is important to your safety and that of your passen gers that you replace deployed air bags and repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure that the vehicle will con tinue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants Safety guidelines for the seat belt emergency tensioning device and air bag Warning JAN e Damaged seat be
261. ir vents can be very hot or very cold depending on the set temperature This may cause burns or frost bite on unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the air vents If necessary use the air distribution control gt page 189 to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin Nearly all dust particles pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system The air conditioning will not engage no cooling if the mode A C is deactivated gt page 194 Warning AN Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and others Severe conditions e g strong air pollution may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior If the vehicle interior is hot ventilate the interior before driving off see Summer opening feature gt page 241 The automatic climate control will then adjust the interior temperature to the set value much fast er Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air flow through exhaust sl
262. ire 383 433 444 Collapsible wheel chock 382 COMAND 444 COMAND see separate COMAND operating instructions Combination switch 49 118 Control system 125 444 Multifunction display 125 Multifunction steering wheel 126 Resetting to factory default 135 Control system menu 125 444 AUDIO 131 Menus overview 128 NAV 134 Settings 135 Standard display 130 TEL 152 Trip computer 150 Vehicle status message memory 134 Control system submenus 127 129 Convenience 148 Instrument cluster 138 Lighting 144 Time Date 140 Vehicle 147 Controller Area Network see CAN system Coolant 301 439 Anticorrosion antifreeze quantity 440 Capacities 436 Checking coolant level 295 301 Messages indisplay 367 369 Temperature 292 Temperature gauge Cruise control 245 444 Message indisplay 370 Cup holder 258 260 Cleaning 346 Curb weight 332 Customer Assistance Center see CAC 25 123 D Date display setting 142 143 Daytime running lamp mode 116 Setting 144 Deep water see Standing water Defogging windshield Automatic climate control Canada only 191 Climate control 180 Defrosting Front Automatic climate control Canada only 190 Climate control 179 Defrosting Rear 173 Delayed shut off Exterior lamps 146 Interior lighting 147 Department of Transportation see DOT Difficulties While driving 52 With starting 46 Digital clock see clock Digital speedometer 130 Dimensions vehicle 435 Direction of rotation tires 308 Dis
263. ire code gt page 322 indicates the tire construction type The R stands for radial tire type Letter D means diag onal or bias ply construction letter B means belted bias ply construction At the tire manufacturer s option any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph 240 km h can include a ZR in the size designation for example 245 40 ZR 18 For additional information see Tire speed rating gt page 324 Rim diameter The rim diameter gt page 322 is the diameter of the bead seat not the diameter of the rim edge Rim diameter is indicated in inches in Tire load rating The tire load rating G gt page 322 is a numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support For example a load rating of 91 corre sponds to a maximum load of 1356 Ibs 615 kg the tire is designed to support See also Maximum tire load gt page 327 where the maximum load as sociated with the load index Is indicated in kilograms and lbs Warning AN The tire load rating must always be at least half of the GAWR gt page 332 of your vehi cle Otherwise tire failure may be the result which may cause an accident and or seri ous personal injury to you or others Always replace rims and tires with the same designation manufacturer and type as shown on the original part Warning A N Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle cap
264. k P88 50 2614 31 1 Handle 2 Handles gt Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on handle Q or handles Close trunk lid with hands placed flat on trunk lid Warning A N To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk Be espe cially careful when small children are around When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning A N Only drive with the trunk closed as among other dangers such as blocked visibility ex haust fumes may enter the vehicle interior Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Do not place the SmartKey in the open trunk You may lock yourself out If the vehicle was previously centrally locked the trunk will lock automatical ly after closing it The turn signals will flash three times to confirm locking Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Trunk emergency release With the emergency release button the trunk can be opened from inside the trunk The emergency release button is located on the inside of the trunk lid Q Emergency release button gt Briefly press emergency release button Q The trunk unlocks
265. kips to the next channel within the current cat egory Scan search can be terminated manually Press SC soft key The search starts SC appears in the display Press SC soft key again The search stops Controls in detail Audio system Obtaining additional text information Additional text information artist title related to the current channel can be displayed gt Press INF soft key The title being played is displayed Press INF soft key again The name of the artist performing the title being played is displayed If a button is not pressed within 4 seconds the radio will return to the standard display Controls in detail Audio system Storing stations Calling up the ESN information menu gt Tune in desired station gt Press INF soft key gt Press and hold desired station gt Press ESN soft key purton EN o BE until a brief signal The twelve digit electronic serial tone 1 feara number ESN of the SAT tuner The frequency is stored on the selected installed in your vehicle is displayed station button gt Press RET soft key to exit the menu The radio saves the current station at the memory preset selected The memory preset selected appears in the Status line e g S3 There are ten presets available An existing entry is overwritten in the memory list when a new entry Is given CD mode Safety precautions Warning A N The single CD player and t
266. km h can include a Tire load rating G gt page 322 and also referred to as service descrip tion tire speed rating gt page 322 are ZR in the size designation for exam ple 245 40 ZR18 To determine the maximum speed capability of the tire the service description for the tire must be referred to The service description is comprised of the tire load rating G gt page 322 and the tire speed rating gt page 322 If your tire includes ZR in the size designation and no service description G and 6 gt page 322 is given the tire manufacturer must be consulted for the maximum speed capability If a service description and gt page 322 is given the speed capa bility is limited by the speed symbol in the service description Example 245 40 ZR18 97Y In this example 97Y is the service description The letter Y designates the speed rating and the speed capabil ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph 300 km h Any tire with a speed capability above 186 mph 300 km h must include a ZR in the size designation AND the service description must be placed in parenthesis Example 275 40 ZR 18 99Y The Y speed rating in paren thesis designates the maximum speed capability of the tire as being above 186 mph 300 km h Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual maximum permissible speed of the tire All Season an
267. l also deactivate the immobilizer In case the engine cannot be started yet the vehicle s battery is charged the system is not operational Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA or 1 800 387 0100 in Canada Anti theft alarm system Once the alarm system has been armed a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone opens e adoor e the trunk e the hood The alarm will stay on even if the activating element e g a door is immediately closed The alarm system will also be triggered when e someone attempts to raise the vehicle only vehicles with tow away alarm e opening the vehicle with the mechanical key e someone opens a door from the inside e someone opens the trunk with the emergency release button If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system gt page 264 provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available Arming the alarm system The indicator lamp is in the center console Q Indicator lamp vehicles with tow away gt alarm _ 1 Indicator lamp vehicles without tow away alarm Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey The turn signal lamps flash three times and an acoustic signal sounds three times if equipped and feature activat ed to indica
268. l at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle e g smoke or fire in the vehicle vehicle in a dangerous road location please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca tion The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle s approximate location if they re ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occu pants Roadside Assistance button The Roadside Assistance button S located below the center armrest cover gt Open the storage compartment under the center armrest gt page 257 Press and hold button for longer than 2 seconds A call to a Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display When the connection is established the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number model color and location subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals While the call is connected you can change to the navigation menu by pressing NAVI button on the audio sys tem or COMAND System unit A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established gt
269. lamps switch on automatically The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt gt gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible In the control system set lamp operation to manual gt page 144 Switch on the headlamps using the exterior lamp switch gt page 114 Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Halogen headlamp gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Bi Xenon headlamp gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution Low beam right The right low beam lamp is Halogen headlamp EL Fine Mem gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Bi Xenon headlamp gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Parking lamp The left front parking lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible leit irene malfunctioning Parking lamp The right front parking lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible Pig Eevee malfunctioning Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible SUDSTHICe oulo On A substitute bulb is being used Switch off lights Headlamps have been turned on with the gt Switch off
270. lapsed with handle folded in storage Wheel bolts position gt page 381 BOWE ene am ne ans gt Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly gt Store the jack and the other vehicle counterclockwise until vehicle iS following the diagonal sequence ooie iink resting fully on its own weight illustrated to G until all bolts are gt Remove the jack tight Observe a tightening torque of 80 lb ft 110 Nm V Battery The battery is located in the engine compartment on the right hand side 9 a er ieee 1 Clamps Removing filter box gt Release clamps 1 gt Remove filter box Installing filter box gt Insert filter box properly gt Secure it with clamps Q Warning AN Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries gt page 303 Never lean over batteries while connecting you might get injured Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep flames or sparks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Practical hints Battery Warning VAN Do not place metal objects on the battery as this
271. lay Controls in detail Audio system PIN entry P82 60 4464 31 gt Enter PIN number using buttons EE to Gg gt If necessary correct number entered with the CLR soft key Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered press soft key and hold to delete the complete number gt Press OK soft key after entering correct PIN gt READY or ROAMING will appear in the display Controls in detail Audio system a Placing a call gt If necessary correct number entered If the PIN is entered incorrectly three with the CLR soft key Press soft key times NEED PUK will appear in the Entering a telephone number and briefly to delete the last digit entered starting the dialing process press soft key and hold to delete the display Enter PUK via your telephone Please refer to the separate telephone operating instructions for more information complete number gt After correct telephone number has been entered press button If the telephone number has been ITEN saved together with a name in the _ gt Enter desired telephone number using telephone book the name will appear The volume will increase or decrease buttons J to EG in the display depending on the direction turned Adjusting the volume gt Turn rotary control of button during a telephone call The number can have up to 32 digits Phone book but only twelve of these are visible in The numbers stored in the
272. ld the sunroof switch for If the movement of the tilt sliding disconnected or discharged approximately 1 second sunroof is Heer ae the ede e after the tilt sliding sunroof has been es edit T procedure the tilt sliding sunroof wi closed manually gt page 389 p p stop and reopen slightly gt page 243 e after a malfunction l ne If the tilt sliding sunroof opens e ifthe tilt sliding sunroof does not open completely the tilt sliding sunroof is smoothly synchronized Otherwise repeat the above steps Y Driving systems The driving system of your vehicle is described on the following pages e Cruise control with which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed For information on the BAS ABS and ESP see Driving safety systems gt page 82 Cruise control The cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle The use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extend ed periods of time You can set or resume cruise control at any speed over 20 mph 30 km h The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left hand side of the steering column gt page 22 Controls in detail Driving systems Warning VAN The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation The driver is and must always re main responsib
273. le for the vehicle s speed and for safe brake operation Only use cruise control if the road traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed e The use of cruise control can be danger ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed e The use of cruise control can be danger ous on slippery roads Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control e Deactivate cruise control when driving in fog The Resume function should only be oper ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ ously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed Controls in detail Driving systems 1 Sets current or higher speed 2 Sets current or lower speed 3 Cancels cruise control 4 Resumes at last set speed Setting current speed gt Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed Briefly lift G or depress 2 the cruise control lever The current speed is set Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Cruise control is activated On uphill or downhill grades cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed Once the grade eases the set speed will be resumed Canceling cruise control There are several ways to cancel cruise control gt or Step on the brake pedal Cruise control is canceled The last speed set is stored for later use Br
274. llumination brightness 122 Lamps 350 356 Messages in display see Malfunction display messages Multifunction display 125 Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster Illumination brightness Instruments and controls see Cockpit Interior lighting 120 Delayed shut off 147 Interior rear view mirror 40 Auto dimming mirrors 169 Interior storage spaces see Storage compartment J Jack 380 Jacking up the vehicle 405 Jump starting 415 K Key mechanical Key SmartKey Batteries 98 Battery check lamp 98 Changing batteries 393 Factory setting 96 Locking unlocking 32 96 Locking unlocking Global setting 96 Locking unlocking Selective setting 96 Loss of 98 Messages in display 373 Opening and closing the power 386 windows 241 Opening and closing the tilt sliding sunroof 241 Positions in starter switch 33 Remote control 94 Starting the engine 45 Turning off the engine 56 Unlocking Trunk lid 98 Valet locking 103 Kickdown 158 445 Kilopascal 332 L Labels 426 Certification 426 Emission control information 426 Emission control vacuum line routing 426 Lamp sensor Message in display 375 Lamps exterior 395 396 Light sensor 375 Messages in display 374 375 376 377 Lamps indicator and warning ABS 25 350 Battery SmartKey 96 Brakes 25 351 Engine diagnostics 352 356 Engine malfunction 25 352 353 ESP 25 354 Foglamps 114 Front passenger front air bag off 27 66 Fuel reserve 25 354 High beam headlam
275. ls coolants lubricants etc gt page 436 Brake fluid T If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem For more information see Practical hints gt page 351 Removing fuse box cover gt page 421 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system For more information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 304 Engine oil level For more information on engine oil level see Engine oil gt page 298 Operation At the gas station Vehicle lighting Check function and cleanliness For more information on replacing light bulbs see Replacing bulbs gt page 394 Exterior lamp switch gt page 114 Operation At the gas station Tire inflation pressure For more information on tire inflation pres sure see Checking tire inflation pressure gt page 317 Operation Engine compartment Vv Engine compartment Hood gt Pull lever Q downwards gt page 297 gt Push lever 2 under the hood upwards The hood is unlocked and handle 2 gt Pull up on the hood and then release it Warning mn B The hood will be automatically held
276. ltered in any way Moreover the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes Benz servicing requirements For details refer to the Maintenance Booklet Operation Driving instructions Warning A N Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide CO and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death Do not run the engine in confined areas such as a garage which are not properly ventilated If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving have the cause determined and corrected immediately If you must drive under these conditions drive only with at least one window fully open at all times Coolant temperature During severe operating conditions and stop and go city traffic the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately 248 F 120 C The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature over 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning A N e Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned e Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam com ing from it Turn off the engin
277. lternator AC compressor etc from the engine Power train Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit motive power to the drive axles including e engine e clutch torque converter e transmission e transfer case e drive shaft e differential e axle shafts axles Production options weight gt page 333 Program mode selector switch Used to switch the automatic transmission between standard operation S comfort operation C and manual operation M PSI Pounds per square inch gt page 333 Recommended tire inflation pressure gt page 333 Restraint systems Seat belts belt tensioners air bags and child restraint systems As inde pendent systems their protective functions complement one another Rim gt page 333 RON Research Octane Number The Research Octane Number for gaso line as determined by a standardized method It is an indication of a gaso line s ability to resist undesired deto nation knocking The average of both the gt MON Motor Octane Number and RON Research Octane Number is posted at the pump also known as ANTI KNOCK INDEX Shift lock When the vehicle is parked this lock prevents the transmission gear selector lever from being moved out of position P without SmartKey turned and brake pedal depressed Sidewall gt page 333 SRS Supplemental Restraint System Seat belts emergency tensioning device and air bags Though indepen
278. lts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked Only use belts in stalled or supplied by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center e Air bags and emergency tensioning devices ETDs are designed to function on a One time only basis An air bag or ETD that was activated must be replaced No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS This includes changing or re moving any component or part of the SRS the installation of additional trim material badges etc over the steering wheel hub passenger front air bag cover outboard sides of the front seat backrests door trim panels or door frame trims and installation of addition al electrical electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring Keep area between air bags and occupants free from objects e g packages purs es umbrellas etc Do not pass belts over sharp edges They could tear Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide ade quate protection Do not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door These items may turn into projec tiles and cause head and other injuries when curtain air bag is deployed Never place your feet on the instrument panel dashboard or on the seat
279. ly Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing Warning A N Do not pass belts over sharp edges They could tear Do not allow the belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism This could damage the belt Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts This could impair the effective ness of the belts Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Starting the engine Warning A N Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide CQ and inhaling it can cause un consciousness and possible death Do not run the engine in confined areas such as garage which are not properly ven tilated If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving have the cause determined and corrected imme diately If you must drive under these condi tions drive only with at least one window fully open Getting started kets Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission P Park position with gear selector lever lock R Reverse gear N Neutral position D Drive position For more information see Automatic transmission gt page 155 Getting started Driving Starting gt Pla
280. m Driving instructions At the gas station Engine compartment Tires and wheels Winter driving Maintenance Vehicle care Operation The first 1000 miles 1500 km In the Operation section you will find detailed information on operating main taining and caring for your vehicle The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break in period the more satis fied you will be with its performance later on e Drive your vehicle during the first 1000 miles 1500 km at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds e During this period avoid heavy loads full throttle driving and excessive engine speeds no more than ne of maximum rpm in each gear e Shift gears in a timely manner e Avoid accelerating by kick down e Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever e Select positions 3 2 or 1 only when driving at moderate speeds for hill driving e Select C as the preferred shift program gt page 161 for the first 1000 miles 1500 km After 1000 miles 1500 km you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds to the permissible maximum Additional instructions e During the first 1000 miles 1500 km do not exceed a speed of 85 mph 140 km h e During this period avoid engine speeds above 4500 rpm in each gear All of the above instructions as may apply to your vehicle type also apply when driving the first
281. m system gt page 88 and Tow away alarm gt page 90 Garage door opener The integrated remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled devices It provides a convenient way to re place up to three hand held remote con trols used to operate devices such as garage door openers gate openers or oth er devices compatible with HomeLink or some other systems Before the integrated remote control can be used it must be programmed to the ga rage door opener gate operator or other device you wish to operate See the follow ing instructions for programming informa tion rr P68 00 4047 31 Interior rear view mirror with integrated re mote control Indicator lamp Signal transmitter button Needed for programming not part of vehi cle equipment Hand held remote control of ga rage door opener gate operator or other device 6 Hand held remote control but ton Controls in detail Useful features A Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent po tential harm or damage When programming a garage door opener the door moves up or down When programming a gate operator the gate opens or closes Warning Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as
282. made Redial If the number you have dialed is busy you can again place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the redial function If you have activated the automatic re dial function on your mobile telephone the number of the person being called is automatically redialed after a short waiting period if there is a busy signal Refer to the separate operating instruc tions for the mobile telephone e Manual redial ng TER Le ies CLE NUM RCU P82 60 4621 31 Press button The telephone number last dialed will appear in the display Select desired telephone number with button W or BA The letter L and the number of the memory position appears in the left hand corner of the display The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received When you have selected a number press button The call will be made Controls in detail Audio system Accepting an incoming call If the telephone is active in the background reception symbol is visible in the display the audio source is muted when an incom ing call is received A ringing tone can be heard and the caller s telephone number or the name under which the telephone number has been saved in the telephone book appears in the display If the caller s number is not relayed CALL will appear in the display gt Press button The call is accepted Controls in detail Audio system Muting a call It is pos
283. manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced The TIN is a unique identifier which facili tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchasers the means to easily identify such tires The TIN is comprised of Manufacturer s identification mark Tire size Tire type code and Date of manufacture DOT 2 Manufacturer s identification mark 3 Tire size 4 Tire type code at the option of the tire manufacturer Date of manufacture o For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration DOT Department of Transportation A tire branding symbol C gt page 326 which denotes the tire meets require ments of the U S Department of Transpor tation Manufacturer s identification mark The manufacturer s identification mark 2 gt page 326 denotes the tire manufacturer New tires have a mark with two symbols Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym bols For more information on retreaded tires see gt page 305 Tire size The code 8 gt page 326 indicates the tire size Tire type code The code 4 gt page 326 may at the option of the manufacturer be used as a descriptive code for identifying significant characteristics of the tire Da
284. mate control Canada only Audio system Power windows Power tilt sliding sunroof Driving systems Loading Useful features Controls in detail Locking and unlocking In the Controls in detail section you will find detailed information on how to oper ate the equipment installed on your vehi cle If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba sic functions of the vehicle refer to the Getting started section of this manual The corresponding page numbers are giv en at the beginning of each segment For more information on locking and unlocking see Getting started gt page 32 and gt page 54 SmartKey Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys each with remote control and a removable mechanical key The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys are a different color to help distinguish each SmartKey unit The SmartKey provides an extended oper ating range To prevent theft however it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks e the doors e the trunk e the fuel filler flap P80 35 2087 31 SmartKey with remote control Lock button 2 Opening button for trunk 3 Mechanical key locking tab 4 Unlock button Battery check lamp
285. matically after ap proximately 10 minutes Controls in detail Instrument cluster For a full view illustration of the instrument cluster see At a glance gt page 24 1 Reset button The instrument cluster is activated when you e open a door e switch on the ignition gt page 33 e press reset button Q e switch on the exterior lighting You can change the instrument cluster settings in the Instrument cluster submenu of the control system gt page 138 Warning A N No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction dis play is inoperative As a result you will not be able to see infor mation about your driving conditions such as speed or outside temperature warning indicator lamps malfunction warning mes sages or the failure of any systems Driving characteristics may be impaired If you must continue to drive please do so with added caution Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Instrument cluster illumination Use reset button to adjust the illumination brightness for the instrument cluster The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened automatically to suit ambient light conditions The instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted automatically when you switch on the vehicle s exterior lamps To brighten illumination gt Turn reset button Q clockwise The instrument cl
286. ment cluster fails to come on during the bulb self check when switching on the ignition have the respective bulb checked and replaced if necessary Possible cause consequence Suggested solution The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off The BAS and the ESP are also switched off see messages in dis play x gt Continue driving with added caution Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability Read and observe messages in the dis The brake system is still functioning nor mally but without the ABS available If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning other systems such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission may also be malfunctioning play gt page 358 Have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts The ABS has switched off When the voltage is above this value again the ABS is operational again and the ABS in The battery might not be charged suffi aeto Teli Simtel ale oO ciently If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out gt Have the generator alternator and the battery checked USA only Canada only The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving and you hear a warning sound USA only Canada only The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving
287. mpartment air vents Increasing counterclockwise until it stops for one i A Directs air to the windshield side of the vehicle you decrease the E E gt Turn temperature control 2 and or temperature for the other side at the 3 gt page 175 slightly clockwise AC aie bj Directs air into the entire The climate control system will corre vehicle interior spondingly adjust the interior air tem Directs air to the footwells perature gt Press button Ag gt page 175 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The automatic air distribution is switched off The air distribution is If you turn the temperature control clockwise until it stops for one side of the vehicle you increase the tempera ture for the other side at the same time controlled according to the selected control setting gt Turn air distribution control gt page 175 to the desired symbol Opening center and side air vents gt Turn thumbwheels 3 and gt page 175 upward The center air vents and and side air vents 2 and are open Closing center and side air vents gt Turn thumbwheels 3 and gt page 175 downward The center air vents and and side air vents 2 and are closed Adjusting air volume Six blower speeds are available gt Press button A gt page 175 The indicator lamp in the button goes out The automatic air volume control is switched off The air v
288. n be stored for each main entry name These entries are marked by a corresponding abbreviation that appears in the upper left hand corner of the display The following abbreviations for sub entries are possible CEL Mobile phone HOM Home WOR Work FAX Fax PAG Pager TEL Main gt gt Controls in detail Audio system gt When you have selected a number press button The call will be made Viewing the telephone number of a telephone book entry gt Search for desired entry gt Press NUM soft key The telephone number of the phone book entry appears in the display Returning calls received LL MUM ROU P82 60 4467 31 Press MEM soft key or press button WW or BA Press RCV soft key received calls The number of received calls and then the call last received appear briefly in the display Select desired telephone number with button WN or BA The letter R and the number of the memory position appear in the upper left hand corner of the display The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received When you have selected a number press button The call will be made Speed dial If you have stored telephone numbers as speed dial numbers in your telephone you can also enter these with buttons J to QM on the radio head unit gt Press desired button EEE to EE briefly gt Press button The call will be made Turbo dial If you have stored teleph
289. n pull the switch past the resistance point and release the automatic reversal will not function Stopping windows gt Press or pull respective switch again Synchronizing power windows The power windows must be resynchronized each time after the battery has been disconnected or discharged if the power windows cannot be fully opened Express open or closed Express close Switch on the ignition gt page 33 Pull the power window switches until the side windows are closed Hold the switches for approximately 1 second The power windows are synchronized Summer opening feature If the weather is warm you can ventilate the vehicle before driving off by simulta neously e opening the side windows e opening the tilt sliding sunroof gt Aimtransmitter eye at the driver s door handle The SmartKey must be in close proximity to the door handle gt Press and hold button until the windows and the tilt sliding sunroof have reached the desired position gt Release button to interrupt proce dure Convenience closing feature Warning A N When closing the windows and the tilt slid ing sunroof make sure that there is no dan ger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure If potential danger exists proceed as fol lows e Release button to stop the closing procedure To open press and hold button gi To continue the closing procedure after making sure that there is no
290. n the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Status line display P54 392 2363 31 Controls in detail Control system gt Press button or E to select the desired setting The selected display is then shown continuously in the lower display The other display now appears in the menu of the standard display e Digital speedometer or e Outside temperature Controls in detail Control system Time Date submenu Access the Time Date submenu via the Settings menu Use the Time Date submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings The following functions are available Function Page Time synchronization with 140 head unit Set time hours 140 Set time minutes 141 Select automatic time change 142 Daylight Saving Time DST summer Standard time winter Set date month 142 Set date day 143 Set date year 143 Time synchronization with head unit This function can only be seen on vehicles with COMAND and navigation module gt Move the selection marker with button or SH to the Time Date submenu gt Press button JM or Red repeatedly until the message Time synchro w Head Unit appears in the multifunc tion display The selection marker is on the current setting Time synchro w Head Unit OTT P 4 32 2578 31 gt Press button or E to select the desired setting Set the time hours This funct
291. nce the grip of the brake pads Warning A N Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking ma neuvers Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System BAS gt page 84 If the parking brake is released and the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir Have the brake system inspected immediately Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by qualified technicians only Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes Benz A If other than recommended brake pads are installed or other than recommended brake fluid is used the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired This could result in an accident Warning When driving down long and steep grades relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine s braking power This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear After hard braking it is advisable to drive on for some time rather than immediately park so that the air stream will cool down the brakes faster Driving off Apply the brakes to test them briefly af
292. nctions are active Check with your local service providers If you cannot make an emergency call you will have to initiate rescue measures yourself GSM network phones Placing a 911 emergency call using audio head unit with the phone locked Press button to switch to telephone operation PIN appears in the audio display Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit Press 0K soft key or button for dialing to begin DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection Wait until the emergency call center answers then describe the emergency Placing a 911 emergency call using audio head unit with the phone unlocked gt Press button to switch to telephone operation Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit Press button for dialing to begin DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection Wait until the emergency call center answers then describe the emergency If no SIM card is in the mobile phone NO SERVICE appears in the audio display In that case you only can make an emergency call on the mobile phone itself without the use of the head unit TDMA CDMA network phones Placing a 911 emergency call using audio head unit with the phone locked gt Press button to switch to telephone operation CODE appears in the audio display gt Enter 911 using the numb
293. nd 3 or and G gt page 185 to sepa rately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compart ment The temperature of the vehicle interior is adjusted automatically Controls in detail Automatic climate control Canada only Deactivating gt Press button M gt page 185 again The indicator lamp on the button goes out The automatic operation of air vol ume and air distribution switches off Setting the temperature Use temperature controls 3 and 3 for the left side or and i for the right side gt page 185 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small incre ments preferably starting at 22 C 72 F The automatic climate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible Increasing gt Press temperature button G and or 6 gt page 185 until the de sired temperature appears in the con trol panel display gt page 185 The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature If you increase the temperature for one side of the vehicle to the highest ad justable value then you will see the message HI in the display This also in creases the temperature for the other side of the vehicle at the same time Decreasing gt Press temperature button 11 and or 3 gt page 18
294. ne of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 MIBE must not exceed 15 The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3 plus additional cosolvents Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not allowed Gasohol which contains 10 ethanol and 90 unleaded gasoline can be used These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements such as resistance to spark knock boiling range vapor pressure etc Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Coolants The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion antifreeze which provides e Corrosion protection e Freeze protection e Boiling protection by increasing the boiling point The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately 22 F 30 C and corrosion protection If the antifreeze mixture is effective to 22 F 30 C the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approx 266 F 130 C Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corro sion protection and increase boil over protection Refer to Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval Coolant system design and coolant used determine the replacement interval The replacement interval published in the Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if MB 325 0 anticorrosion antifreeze solution or other
295. nforma tion see Battery gt page 411 and Jump starting gt page 415 the gear selector lever will remain locked in position P For informa tion on manually unlocking the transmission gear selector lever gt page 388 Installing towing eye bolt PB8 20 2547 31 2 Cover on right side of rear bumper Practical hints Towing the vehicle Removing cover gt Press mark on cover or in direction of arrows gt Lift cover off to reveal the threaded hole for towing eye bolt The towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit located in the compartment under neath the trunk floor gt Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with lug wrench Reinstalling cover gt Fit cover G or and snap into place Practical hints Fuses Fuses are designed to protect the electri cal circuits in your vehicle from a short cir cuit If a fuse is blown the component s and systems secured by that fuse will stop operating The following aids are available to help you replace fuses gt page 420 e Fuse chart e Spare fuses e Fuse extractor A Only use fuses approved by Mercedes Benz with the specified amperage for the system in question Using other fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire and or cause damage to electrical components and or systems Warning Never attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse Have the cause determined and remedied by an
296. ng or pulling the respective switch If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pulled the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the window the automatic reversal function will stop the window and open it slightly If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the window by pulling and holding the switch by pressing and holding button on the SmartKey or by press ing and holding button or EEJ on the automatic climate control panel the auto matic reversal function will not operate When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and or serious personal injury You can also open or close the power windows using the SmartKey see Summer opening feature gt page 241 and Convenience clos ing feature gt page 241 Opening the windows gt Press switch 1 to to the resistance point The corresponding window will move downwards until you release the switch Controls in detail Power windows Fully opening the windows Express open gt Press switch 4 to past the resistance point and release The corresponding window opens completely De
297. nk recessed handle for a minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing The message Connecting call appears in the multifunction display message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command Once the vehicle is unlocked a Response Center specialist may attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center you must wait 15 minutes before pulling gt Pass this number on to the Mercedes Benz Response Center along with your password Issued to you when you subscribed to the service The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle s Tele Aid system Once the vehicle is located the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you The vehicle s location will only be provided to law enforcement As an alternative you may unlock the vehi cle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call the tailgate recessed handle again The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature 272 When the anti theft alarm or the tow away alarm if equipped stays on for more than 30 seconds a call is ini tiated automatically to the Response Center See Anti theft alar
298. not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated Operation Tires and wheels Overinflated tires Tire labeling 1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards gt page 329 2 DOT Tire Identification Number TIN gt page 326 3 Maximum tire load gt page 327 4 Maximum tire inflation pressure gt page 328 Manufacturer 6 Tire ply material gt page 331 7 Tire size designation load and speed rating gt page 322 Load identification gt page 325 9 Tire name Overinflated tires can Besides tire name sales designation and manufacturer name a number of markings can be found on a tire e adversely affect handling characteristics e cause uneven tire wear Following are some explanations for the e be more prone to damage from road markings on your vehicle s tires hazards e adversely affect ride comfort e increase stopping distance Warning A N Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc P40 10 3561 31 For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires is specific to each vehi
299. ntrol Rear window defroster AC cooling on off Air distribution and air volume automatic mode Air recirculation Front defroster Controls in detail Climate control The climate control is operational when Nearly all dust particles pollutants and a ever the engine is running You can oper odors are filtered out before outside air en ate the climate control system ineitherthe ters the passenger compartment through automatic or manual mode The system the air distribution system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature severe conditions e g strong air pollution may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior The air conditioning will not engage no cooling if the mode A C is deactivated gt page 182 If the vehicle interior is hot ventilate A the interior before driving off see Warning A N Summer opening feature gt page 241 The climate control will Warning When operating the climate control the air that enters the passenger compartment Follow the recommended settings for heat ing and cooling given on the following pag through the air vents can be very hot or very cold depending on the set temperature This may cause burns or frostbite on unpro tected skin in the immediate area of the air vents Always keep sufficient dist
300. number keys to enter desired under this number and the PTY function channel within 8 seconds e g EE changes to the category corresponding EJ PEE TAON The system tunes to channel 16 Tuning via manual channel input The station you have selected begins to P82 60 4462 31 play The current PTY category of the Station Is displayed You can only enter available channel gt Press lt lt lt or gt gt gt soft key numbers This switches between the individual categories Tuning via the program category list P82 60 4461 31 When changing the category the Example tuning in channel 16 The category list contains all currently channel selected last in the new receivable categories of programs It is category becomes audible arranged alphabetically or The system will automatically switch to a station of the selected category if the currently selected station is not of the selected category Otherwise the currently selected station remains tuned Tuning a station within the selected category The channels identified for the currently selected category are arranged numerically Only one entry is visible at a time gt Press or button briefly The next station within the category is started gt Press and hold or ex button for approx 3 seconds until desired station has been reached Tuning via scan search Scan search is characterized as follows Scan search plays a channel for approx 8 seconds and then s
301. nuts securing the battery Remove the battery bracket Pull out the battery ventilation hose from the battery depending on battery arrangement in your vehicle model the ventilation hose is located either on the left or right side of the battery Take out the battery Charging and reinstalling the battery Warning A N Never charge a battery while still installed in the vehicle unless the accessory battery charge unit approved by Mercedes Benz is being used Gases may escape during charg ing and cause explosions that may result in paint damage corrosion or personal injury An accessory battery charge unit specially adapted for Mercedes Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes Benz is available permitting the charging of the bat tery in its installed position Contact an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center for information and availability Charge battery in accordance with the separate instruc tions for the accessory battery charger gt Charge battery in accordance with the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer gt Reinstall the charged battery Follow the previously described steps in reverse order The battery its filler caps and the bat tery ventilation hose must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation Practical hints Battery Reconnecting the battery Always connect the battery in the order described below Otherwise the vehicle s electronics can be
302. nz Limited Warranty Downshifting A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control Warning gt Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program This action simulta neously limits the gear range of the transmission gt page 160 To avoid overrevving the engine when the gear selector lever is moved to the D direction the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s max speed would be exceeded Upshifting gt Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program This action simul taneously extends the gear range of the transmission Canceling gear range limit gt Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D direction until D reappears in the multifunction display The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D Shifting into optimal gear range gt Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D direction The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration This
303. o system or COMAND System Controls in detail Useful features Information button The Information button is located below the center armrest cover gt Open the storage compartment under the center armrest gt page 257 gt Press and hold button for longer than 2 seconds A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display When the connection is established the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number model color and lo cation subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals While the call is connected you can change to the navigation menu by pressing NAVI button on the audio sys tem or COMAND System A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be estab lished Information regarding the operation of your vehicle the nearest Mercedes Benz Center or Mercedes Benz USA products and services is available to you For more details concerning the Tele Aid system please visit www mbusa com and use your ID and password sent to you sep arately to learn more USA only The indicator lamp in the Information button remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the
304. of closed Remove the cover p e raise sunroof at the rear P 8 00 3101 31 Take the crank 3 out of the Operator s C Lens Manual pouch gt Remove SmartKey from the starter _ e slide sunroof open switch Do not disconnect electrical connectors gt Turn crank counterclockwise to e lower sunroof at the rear gt gt gt Pry off lens Q using a flat blade screwdriver LI Practical hints Opening closing in an emergency gt E O Turn crank slowly and smoothly The tilt sliding sunroof must be synchronized after being operated manually gt page 244 Y Resetting activated head restraints Resetting activated head restraints If the active head restraints have been trig gered in a rear end collision the active head restraints must be reset Otherwise the active head restraint cannot offer any additional protection in the event of anoth er rear end collision I O For your convenience we recommend y that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center You will find the reset tool for manually p operating the active head restraints in the Mercedes Benz vehicle literature pouch Practical hints Resetting activated head restraints P91 16 230 Take the reset tool out of the Mercedes Benz vehicle literature pouch Guide reset tool into center of head re straint between head restraint cushion and rear head restraint cover Take care to avo
305. of the track is shown in the display during the search Scan Starting scan gt Press SC soft key SC will appear in the display Each track on the current CD will be played for approx 8 seconds in as cending order Ending scan gt Press SC soft key or or xg Controls in detail Audio system Random play The random function RDM plays the tracks of the current CD in random order When you start the RDM function the RPT function is automatically switched off e Switching on random gt Press RDM soft key RDM appears in the display A randomly selected track is played e Switching off random gt Press RDM soft key again Controls in detail Audio system Repeat The track being played is repeated until the repeat function is switched off When you start the RPT function the RDM function is automatically switched off e Switching on repeat gt Press RPT soft key RPT appears in the display e Switching off repeat gt Press RPT soft key again Pause function Track and time display The CD changer mode is interrupted by an incoming call on the telephone gt page 227 e Switching on pause function Pa2 60 4557 31 gt Press T soft key The number of the track being played and the elapsed playing time appear in P82 60 4556 31 the display gt Press button gt Press T soft key again The CD changer mode is The total number of tracks and the
306. old buttons and et 4 l l driver s door gt page 387 and the gt Press button twice simultaneously for about 6 seconds un l trunk gt page 103 til battery check lamp gt page 94 eel a flashes twice e Have the vehicle battery and the battery connections checked gt page 411 e An acoustic signal sounds once if equipped and feature activated The SmartKey is set to factory setting again e The locking knobs in the doors If the SmartKey is malfunctioning move up contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center e The anti theft alarm system is dis armed Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Checking the batteries gt Press button or a Battery check lamp gt page 94 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order If battery check lamp G does not come on briefly during check then the SmartKey batteries are discharged Replace the batteries gt page 393 You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center 5 O If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle pressing the or button will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly Unlocking and opening the trunk You can unlock and open the trunk separately A minimum height clearance of 5 71 ft 1 74 m is required to open the trunk lid gt Press button until trunk lid unlocks and begins to open Ba The trunk lid swings open up
307. old the signal transmitter trol that came with the garage door ae peermedia iy button or Do not release opener gate operator or other device an this button until it has been successful You may need it for use in other vehi O ti f int ted t trol ly trained cles for future programming of an PES A EE Us gt While still holding down the signal integrated remote control or simply for Switch on the ignition gt page 33 transmitter button or continued use as a hand held remote Select and press the appropriate inte control to operate the respective ee a grated signal transmitter button device in other situations 3 or 4 to activate the remote con cycle your hand held remote control button as follows Press and hold button 6 for 2 seconds then release trolled device i i Reprogramming a single signal trans aire wet t ib re o ane ee eae alli The integrated remote control trans nen na eee nf a mitter continues to send the signal as quence on tne nand NEId remote con To program a device using a signal trans long as the button is pressed up to trol until the frequency signal hasbeen mitter button previously trained follow 20 seconds learned Upon successful training the these steps indicator lamp Q will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds gt switch on the ignition gt page 33 Controls in detail Useful features If another hand h
308. olume is adjusted according to the currently selected setting gt Use the air volume control gt page 175 to adjust the air volume Front defroster You can use this setting to defrost the windshield for example if it is iced up You can also defog the windshield and the side windows o Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the side windows are clear again Controls in detail Climate control Activating gt Press button emg or gt page 175 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air conditioning switches automatically to the following functions maximum blowing and heating power air flows onto the windshield and the front side windows the air recirculation mode is switched off Deactivating gt Press button emg or gt page 175 again The indicator lamp on the button goes out Defrosting is turned off The cooling remains switched on Controls in detail Climate control Windshield fogged on the outside Air recirculation mode Activating Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent meee GURON KE page 179 Keep this setting selected only untilthe unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle The indicator lamp on the button windshield is clear again from the outside e g before driving comes on through a tunnel This setting cuts off the gt Switch the windshield wipers on intake of outside air and recirculates the gt page 50 ai
309. om the starter switch and the tilting portion of the tilt sliding sunroof open One or more main functions of the Tele gt Aid system are malfunctioning This display appears if button or on the multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone You are attempting to drive with the trunk gt open The fluid level has dropped to gt about Wie of total reservoir capacity Close the tilt sliding sunroof gt page 242 Close the tilt sliding sunroof gt page 242 Have the Tele Aid system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Close the trunk Add washer fluid gt page 304 Practical hints Where will I find First aid kit The first aid kit is located in the trunk on the left side secured by a hook and loop fastener Q First aid kit 2 Hook and loop fastener gt Unfasten hook and loop fastener 2 gt Remove first aid kit 4 Check expiration dates and contents for completeness at least once a year and replace missing expired items Vehicle tool kit The vehicle tool kit is located in the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor The following is included e Towing eye bolt e Wheel wrench e Alignment bolt e Vehicle jack e Spare fuses e Valve extractor e Protective wrap e Collapsible wheel chock e A pair of gloves Removing the vehicle tool kit gt Lift up trunk floor cover and engage t
310. on R the following lamps will switch on during darkness when the vehi cle is unlocked with the SmartKey e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps e Front fog lamps The locator lighting switches off when the driver s door is opened If you do not open a door after unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey the lamps will switch off automatically after approxi mately 40 seconds gt Move the selection marker with button or SSM to the Lighting submenu gt gt Controls in detail Control system gt gt gt Press button EAN or RA repeatedly until the message Surround lighting appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Surround lighting Ori Off fo P 4 32 2974 31 gt Press button or E to switch the locator lighting function On gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position W when exiting the vehicle gt page 114 The locator lighting feature is activated Set night security illumination Headlamps delayed shut off Use this function to set whether or not the exterior lamps illuminate during darkness after exiting the vehicle and all doors closed With the delayed shut off feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position Eig before the engine is turned off the following lamps will switch on when the engine is turned off and remain lit for approximately 15 seconds e Parking lam
311. on door handle 2 on the Handle locked with the SmartKey opening a respective rear door to open door door from the inside will trigger the anti theft alarm system Controls in detail Locking and unlocking The vehicle must be unlocked Opening the trunk from the inside gt Press switch Q until the trunk begins gt Pull on handle You can open the trunk from the inside if oer the vehicle is stationary The indicator lamp in the switch The trunk opens See A minimum height clearance of 5 71 ft remains lit as long as the trunk is open Hi 1 74 m is required to open the trunk lid T The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance If the trunk does not open it is still locked separately gt page 103 The remote trunk opening switch is locat ed on the driver s door The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance If the trunk does not open it is still locked separately gt page 103 The trunk can also be opened using button on the SmartKey or from its inside in an emergency see Trunk emer gency release gt page 102 The trunk can also be opened using button on the SmartKey or from its p5425a7a9a1 Inside in an emergency see Trunk emer gency release gt page 102 1 Remote trunk opening switch with indi cator lamp Closing the trun
312. on flashes until the call is conclud ed Emergency calls can only be termi nated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center represen tative whereas Roadside Assistance and Information calls can also be termi nated by pressing button on the multifunction steering wheel or using the END button on the audio system or COMAND System Controls in detail Useful features If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset contact the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada or Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 in the USA or Customer Service at 1 800 387 0100 in Canada Controls in detail Useful features Remote door unlock i Stolen Vehicle Recovery services The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available The SOS button will flash and the In case you have locked your vehicle unin In the event your vehicle was stolen tentionally e g SmartKey inside vehicle gt Report the incident to the police and the reserve SmartKey is not handy P p The police will issue a numbered gt Contact the Mercedes Benz Response incident report Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada You will be asked to provide your pass word which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement Then return to your vehicle and pull the tru
313. on how to adjust the cold tire inflation pressure If you do not adjust the tire inflation pressure excessive heat can build up and result in sudden tire failure Be sure to readjust the tire inflation pressure for normal driving speeds You should wait until the tires are cold before adjusting the tire inflation pressure Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition If such information is provided it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi mately 1 5 psi 0 1 bar per 18 F 10 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire inflation pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature Checking tire inflation pressure Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than one mile 1 6 km If you check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are warm the vehicle has been driven for several miles or sitting less than three hours the reading will be approximately 4 psi 0 3 bar higher than the cold reading This is normal Do not let air out to match the specified cold tire inflation pressure Otherwise the tire will b
314. one numbers as turbo dial numbers in your telephone you can also enter these with buttons J to QM on the radio head unit gt Press desired button EEE to EE until the call is made Redial If the number you have dialed is busy you can again place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the redial function If you have activated the automatic redial function on your telephone the number of the person being called is automatically redialed after a short waiting period if there is a busy signal Refer to the separate operating instructions for the mobile telephone e Manual redial ng TER Le ies CLE NUM RCU P82 60 4621 31 Press button The telephone number last dialed will appear in the display Select desired telephone number with button W or BA The letter L and the number of the memory position appears in the left hand corner of the display The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received When you have selected a number press button The call will be made Controls in detail Audio system Accepting an incoming call If the telephone is active in the background reception symbol is visible in the display the audio source is muted when an incom ing call is received A ringing tone can be heard and the caller s telephone number or the name under which the telephone number has been saved in the phone book appears in the display If the callers number i
315. ont air bag 65 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 27 75 357 Front seat head restraints see Head restraints 106 FSS Flexible Service System Canada vehicles 338 445 Fuel 293 438 Additives 438 Capacities Fuel tank 436 Filling the tank 293 Fuel filler flap and cap Multifunction display messages 353 373 Fuel gauge 25 Fuel reserve warning lamp 354 Requirements Octane rating 439 Technical data 436 438 Fuel consumption statistics After start 150 Since last reset 151 Fuel filler flap 293 Fuel reserve warning lamp 25 Fuel tank Capacity 436 Filler flap 293 Fuels coolants lubricants etc Capacities 436 Fuses 420 Aids for changing fuses 420 Fuse box main in passenger compartment 421 Fuse box in engine compartment 421 Fuse box in trunk 422 Fuse chart 420 Fuse extractor Replacing 420 Spare fuses 420 420 422 G Garage door opener 273 Gasoline also see Fuel Gasoline see Fuel GAWR 332 Gearrange 445 Automatic transmission 160 Limiting 160 162 Shifting into optimal 162 Gear selector lever 45 155 Cleaning 346 Lock 45 Position indicator 156 Position Automatic transmission 125 155 157 Unlocking in an emergency 388 Global locking unlocking see Key Global Positioning System see GPS Glove box 256 Good visibility 169 GPS 445 Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW GVW 332 GVWR 332 H Halogen headlamp see Headlamps Hands free m
316. ont passenger s seat belt with the front passenger seat occupied and with all doors closed are not fastened e and the vehicle speed does not exceed 15 mph 25 km h the seat belt tell tale remains illuminated for as long as either the driver s or front pas senger s seat belt is not fastened Safety and Security Occupant safety e andthe vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph 25 km h the seat belt telltale starts flashing and a warning chime sounds with increasing intensity until both the driver s and front passenger s seat belt are fastened or for a maxi mum of 60 seconds from the time the vehicle speed exceeded 15 mph 25 km h if either the driver s or front passenger s seat belt remains unfas tened If the driver s or front passenger s seat belt remains unfastened after 60 sec onds the seat belt telltale stops flashing and the warning chime stops sounding The seat belt telltale then continues to be illuminated for as long as either the driver s or front pas senger s seat belt are not fastened The seat belt telltale will only go out if both the driver and front passenger s seat belt with the front passenger seat oc cupied are fastened or the vehicle is standing still and a front door is opened For more information on the seat belt telltale Mam see Practical hints gt page 355 Emergency tensioning device ETD seat belt force limiter The seat belts for the front and
317. orarily and should be re e Do not operate vehicle with more than placed with a regular road wheel as quickly one spare wheel mounted as possible For more information see Rims and Tires gt page 429 Spare wheel bolts P40 10 3165 31 1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims 2 Wheel bolt for spare wheel located in trunk with spare wheel Practical hints Where will I find Bg Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mounting the spare wheel The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the spare wheel will physi cally damage the vehicle s brakes Warning A N Make sure to use the original length wheel bolts when remounting the original wheel after it has been repaired Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency Unlocking the vehicle Removing the mechanical key Unlocking the driver s door If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey open the driver s door and the trunk using the mechanical key Unlocking and opening the driver s door and or the trunk with the me chanical key will trigger the anti theft alarm system P80 20 2390 31 To cancel the alarm do one of the 1 Mechanical key locking tab 1 Unlocking following eee ame Key gt Insert the mechanical key into the e Press button or onthe gt Move locking tab Q in direction of driver s door lock until it stops SmartKey me gt Turn the mechanical key counterclock
318. ore information on CD operation see CD mode gt page 214 and for the CD changer see gt page 218 Selecting CD MP3 track vehicles with COMAND and or CD changer gt Turn on the radio and select the CD changer gt page 219 or turn on COMAND and select CD or CD changer Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate operating Instructions 0 A CD with MP3 files insert in the CD changer is handled by the audio COMAND system like an audio CD Information contained on the CD with MP3 files will not shown in the multifunction display or in the au dio COMAND display 1 MP3 mode vehicles with COMAND 2 Current track gt Press button BVA or EAN repeatedly Controls in detail Control system Press button or repeatedly amp until the settings for the CD currently being played appear in the multifunction display Level of information displayed will vary depending on the information con tained on the CD with MP3 files insert in the single CD player of the COMAND system To select a CD from the CD changer magazine press anumber on the audio system or the COMAND system key pad located in the center dashboard For more information on MP3 see MP3 notes gt page 216 and for operating see MP3 playback gt page 217 P54 32 3892 31 until the desired track is selected Controls in detail Control system NAV menu The NAV menu contains the function
319. ored in the phone book of the mobile telephone can be called up either by name or number In addition incoming calls are stored in the phone book This is only possible however when the call information transmitted includes the number of the person calling If the telephone number is not transmitted NO NUMBER will be stored in the phone book Searching and calling up phone book entries by name You can access your mobile telephone s phone book with the audio system You can access both the main entries and the sub entries of your phone book CLR MUM ROU Pe2 60 4559 31 or or Press MEM soft key or press button WW or BA Press desired numerical key to ES The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of the initial letters e g for S Schneider press button four times Press and hold button W or BA The system jumps from one initial letter to the next in ascending or descending order Press and hold button W or B until desired initial letter has been reached Controls in detail Audio system gt Press button WN or Bg repeatedly until desired entry has been reached The stored entries are selected in alphabetical order with the sub entries Several sub entries can be stored for each main entry name These entries are marked by a corresponding abbreviation that appears in the upper left hand corner of the display The following abbrevi
320. orized Mercedes Benz Center correct it Only reset if the proper maintenance service has been performed Resetting the system without performing the proper service as called for by the maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and or other vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Vv Vehicle care Cleaning and care of the vehicle A Warning Many cleaning products can be hazardous Some are poisonous others are flammable Always follow the instructions on the partic ular container Always open your vehicle s doors or windows when cleaning the inside Never use fluids or solvents that are not de signed for cleaning your vehicle Always lock away cleaning products and keep them out of reach of children While in operation even while parked your vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which if gone unchecked can attack the paintwork as well as the under body and cause lasting damage Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions but also by e Air pollution e Road salt e Tar e Gravel and stone chipping To avoid paint damage you should immediately remove e Grease and oil e Fuel e Coolant e Brake fluid e Bird droppings e Insects e Tree resins etc Frequent washing reduces and or elimi nates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences Operation Vehicle care More frequent w
321. ot adjust the steering wheel while driving Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the steering wheel adjustment feature locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Adjusting steering column in or out gt Move the lever in direction of arrows 1 until a comfortable steering wheel position is reached with your arms slightly bent at the elbow When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Adjusting steering column up or down Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch the electrical steering wheel 1 Adjusting steering column in or out gt Move the lever in direction of adjustment feature can be operated when 2 Adjusting steering column up or down arrows 2 the anr s door is open Wace z not gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 Make sure your legs can move freely leave children unattended in the vehicle or and that all the displays including mal with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsu or function and indicator lamps on the in pervised use of vehicle equipment may gt Open the driver s door strument cluster are clearly visible cause an accident and or serious personal injury Easy entry exit feature This feature allows for easier entry into and exit from the vehicle When entering and exiting the vehicle the steering wheel is in its uppermost position The easy entry exit f
322. ot deploy only if the EA REJ indicator lamp gt page 75 remains illuminated Please be sure to check the EA ESS indicator lamp every time you use the special system child seat Should the fee indicator lamp go out while the restraint is installed please check installation If the EA EX indicator lamp remains out do not use the BabySmart restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired Warning A N Do not place powered on laptops cell phones electronic tags such as those used in ski passes and like electronic devices on the front passenger seat Signals from such devices may interfere with the BabySmart system Such signal interference may cause the EA E indicator lamp gt page 75 not to come on during self test or be contin uously lit indicating that the system is not functioning Safety and Security Occupant safety Installation of infant and child restraint systems This vehicle is equipped with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at each of the rear seating positions 1 Cover of top anchorage ring gt Make sure the rear backrest is locked in its upright position gt page 253 bb Safety and Security Occupant safety gt D Warning A N Always lock backrest in its upright position when rear seat bench is occupied by pas sengers or the extended cargo area is not in use Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on
323. otating 335 Run Flat Indicator Canada Tow away alarm 90 Towing eye bolt 419 Turn signals 49 Towing the vehicle 417 Additional in mirrors 395 Tow start 415 417 Bulbs 395 396 Traction 161 334 Cleaning lenses 344 Transmission gear selector lever see Gear Indicatorlamps 25 selector lever Turning off engine 56 Transmission see Automatic transmission U Traveling abroad 290 Uniform Tire Quality Grading only 318 Tread 334 Service life 306 Tread depth 307 336 ooo 334 Sizes 429 Treadwear indicators 334 8 Speedometer 138 Upholstery Cleaning 347 Useful features 256 Speed rating 288 324 334 Temperature 316 330 Terminology 331 Trip computer 150 Trip odometer 123 V Vacuum line routing diagram label 426 Valet locking 103 Vehicle Battery 411 Breaking in the vehicle 282 Care 341 Dimensions 435 Individual settings 135 137 Locking unlocking 104 Locking unlocking in an emergency 386 387 Lowering 410 Modifications and alterations Operating safety 16 Towing 417 Washing 342 343 Weights 435 Vehicle capacity weight 334 Vehicle Identification Number see VIN Vehicle jack 381 Vehicle loading Cargo tie down rings 255 Instructions 254 308 Load limit 435 Roof rack 248 Split rear bench seat 252 Terminology 331 Vehicle maximum load on the tire 334 Vehicle recovery services Stolen Tele Aid 264 Vehicle status message memory 134 Vehicle tool kit 380 Removing 380 VIN 426 448 Voice control system Han
324. otify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If no damage can be determined on the e Major assemblies e Fuel system e Engine mount gt Start the engine in the usual manner Getting started Getting started Parking and locking You have now completed your first drive You have properly stopped and parked your vehicle End your drive as follows Warning A N With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering system In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle Warning A N Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re sult of vehicle movement before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always e Keep right foot on brake pedal e Firmly depress parking brake pedal e Move the gear selector lever to position P e Slowly release brake pedal e When parked on an incline turn front wheels towards the road curb e Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch e Take the SmartKey and lock the vehicle when leaving Parking brake P42 20 21271 31 1 Release handle 2 Parking brake pedal gt
325. ots below the rear window Deactivating the automatic climate control system Warning A N When the automatic climate control is switched off the outside air supply and cir culation are also switched off Only choose this setting for a short time Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and others Deactivating gt Press button gt page 185 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Reactivating gt Press button gt page 185 The indicator lamp on the button goes out Controls in detail Automatic climate control Canada only Operating the automatic climate con trol system in automatic mode When operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature air volume and air distribution In automatic mode cooling with dehu midify is switched on This function can be switched off if necessary The automatic climate control system can be switched on or off separately for the left and right sides of the passenger compartment as required Activating gt Press button Ri gt page 185 while the engine is running The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air volume and air distri bution are adjusted automatically 2 e 28 PERET EPET Bat nies PERET ha P83 40 2633 31 1 Temperature left 2 Blower speed 3 Temperature right gt Use temperature controls 3 a
326. ould be broken The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunctioning Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location and immediately turn off the engine gt Check the poly V belt If it is broken gt Do not continue to drive Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If itis intact gt Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message displayed Doing so could result in seri ous engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the in strument cluster gt page 24 gt Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mer cedes Benz Center gt Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the in strument cluster gt page 24 gt Have the fan replaced as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause consequence Possible solution CRUG SE COMER Cruise control is malfunctioning gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Drive to workshop Center Display malfunction The instrument cluster display is gt Continue driving with added caution aor Soe eee nne Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible The displays for several systems have gt Have the electronic systems checked malfunctioned Some systems them
327. ould turn the exterior lamp switch to position to permit activation of the high beam head lamps With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position E the high beam head lamps cannot be switched on The high beam flasher is available at all times Canada only The daytime running lamp mode is manda tory and therefore in a constant mode When the engine is running and you shift from a driving position to position N or P the low beam headlamps will switch off with a three minute delay When the engine is running and you e turn the exterior lamp switch to position Rg the parking lamps switch on additionally e turn the exterior lamp switch to position Zsyj the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode The corresponding exterior lamps switch on gt page 114 USA only By default the daytime running lamp mode is deactivated Activate the daytime running lamp mode using the control system see Set daytime running lamp mode USA only gt page 144 When the engine Is running and you turn the exterior lamp switch to position or E the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode The corresponding exterior lamps switch on gt page 114 Controls in detail Lighting Locator lighting and night security Fog lamps illumination Fog lamps cannot be switched on with The locator lighting an
328. our vehicle and give important how to information as well as references to Mercedes Benz approved car care products Power washer Follow the instructions provided by the power washer manufacturer on main taining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire Always replace a damaged tire Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface Do not aim directly at electrical parts electrical connec tors seals or other rubber parts Tar stains Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove A tar remover is recommended Paintwork painted body components Affixing stickers adhesive tape or sim ilar materials to painted body compo nents may damage the paintwork Mercedes Benz approved Paint Care should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not bead up This should normally be done every 3 to 5 months de pending on the climate and washing deter gent used Mercedes Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be applied if the paint surface shows signs of embedded dirt i e loss of gloss Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot gt Use the appropriate MB Touch Up Stick for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage i e chips from stones vehicle door
329. ow Q The fuel filler flap springs open Turn fuel cap counterclockwise and hold on to it until possible pressure is released Take off cap and set it in direction of arrow 2 in the recess on the fuel filler flap To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air fully insert filler nozzle unit Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out do not top up or overfill b gt gt D Operation At the gas station Warning A N Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas discharge This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle which could cause personal injury Replace fuel cap by turning it clockwise Check regularly and before a long trip until it audibly engages ee Close fuel filler flap Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the malfunction indicator lamp USA only or the EE malfunction in dicator lamp Canada only to illumi nate Coolant For more information see Practical 2 Brake fluid fuse box cover removed hints gt page 352 and gt page 353 3 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system Opening the hood see gt page 297 j T Coolant For normal replenishing use water pota ble water quality For more information see Coolant level gt page 301 and Fue
330. oyment of the passenger front air bag if a BabySmart compatible child seat is installed See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for availability Bar gt page 331 BAS Brake Assist System System for potentially reducing braking distances in emergency braking situations The system is activated when it senses an emergency based on how fast the brake is applied Bead gt page 331 Bi Xenon headlamps Headlamps which use an electric arc as the light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps Bi Xenon headlamps produce low beam and high beam CAC Customer Assistance Center Mercedes Benz customer service center which can help you with any questions about your vehicle and provide assistance in the event of a breakdown CAN system Controller Area Network Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or windshield wiping depending on vehicle settings and or ambient conditions Cockpit All instruments switches buttons and indicator warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle operation and monitoring Cold tire inflation pressure gt page 331 Collapsible tire An especially compact spare tire that must be inflated with a provided air pump before using It should only be used to bring the vehicle to the nearest service station COMAND Cockpit Management and Data system Information and operating center for
331. pact from the tensioning ams are folded tanward 1 Unlocking If spring could crack the windshield 2 Tab For your convenience we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Installing wiper blades 14 Recess 2 Tab 3 Locking 4 Taper piece Square recess P82 30 2532 31 Lift up the wiper arm as far as you need to position the wiper blade under the wiper arm and hold it Carefully fold the wiper arm back and make sure that the taper piece slides into the recess Q at the wiper blade Make certain that the square recess on the taper piece is on the top oth erwise the taper piece can not slide in the recess 1 at the wiper blade If the square recess 5 is not at the top turn the taper piece 4 around to bring the square recess to the top Slide the tab 2 back in the direction of arrow 3 until it audibly engages The wiper blade is locked Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Hold on to the wiper arm when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield Make certain that the wiper blades are properly installed Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage Practical hints Flat tire A The dimensions of the spare wheel with col lapsible tire are different from those of the road wheels As a result the vehicle
332. pending on current position the win dows may also open or close when the air recirculation button in the control panel of the climate control gt page 175 or automatic climate control Canada only gt page 185 or the charcoal filter button EM in the control panel of the automatic climate control Canada only gt page 193 is pressed and held Fully closing the windows Express close gt Pull switch G to past the resistance point and release Closing the windows gt Pull switch G to to the resistance point The corresponding window will move upwards until you release the switch A If you pull and hold the switch up when closing the window and upward movement of the window is blocked by some obstruc tion including but not limited to arms hands fingers etc the automatic reversal will not operate The corresponding window closes completely Warning gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 Controls in detail Power windows If the upward movement of the window is blocked during the closing procedure the window will stop and open slightly Remove the obstruction pull the switch again past the resistance point and release If the window still does not close when there is no obstruction then pull and hold the switch again The side window will then close without the obstruction sensor function A Warning Drivers door only If within 5 seconds you agai
333. perational The brake system is still functioning normally but without the systems specified above If the yellow ESP warning lamp flash es while driving and this message appears the electronic traction system has switched off to prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes The self diagnosis has not been completed yet The ESP BAS and the Run Flat Indicator are temporarily deactivated The brake system is still functioning normally but without the systems specified above Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Continue driving with added caution gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident As soon as the brakes have cooled off the electronic traction system switches on again The display will clear after driving a short dis tance at more than 12 mph 20 km h Practical hints What to do if Display message ESP unavailable see Operator s Manual malfunction Visit workshop Display malfunction Visit workshop Possible cause consequence The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts The battery might not be charged sufficiently The ESP BAS and the Run Flat Indicator are deactivated The brake system is still functioning normally but without the systems specified above The ESP is deactivated because of a malfunction The ESP BAS and th
334. phone book of the telephone can be called up either by name or number The volume can be adjusted separately the display for telephone mode and audio mode Adjusting sound In addition incoming calls are stored in the gt Adjust sound during a telephone call phone book Sound adjustment gt page 201 This is only possible however when the call information transmitted includes the number of the person calling If the telephone number is not transmitted NO NUMBER will be stored in the phone book Searching and calling up telephone book entries by name You can access your mobile telephone s phone book using the audio system You can access both the main entries and the sub entries of your phone book MUM RoW CLR PEZ 60 4559 31 or or Press MEM soft key or press button WW or BA Press desired numerical key to ES The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of the initial letters e g for S Schneider press button four times Press and hold button W or BA The system jumps from one initial letter to the next in ascending or descending order Press and hold button W or B until desired initial letter has been reached Controls in detail Audio system gt Press button WN or Bg repeatedly until desired entry has been reached The stored entries are selected in alphabetical order with the sub entries Several sub entries ca
335. play 339 Resetting the maintenance service indicator 340 Vehicle Care sssensssesssssessseseesseessssee 341 Cleaning and care of the vehicle 341 Practical hints ce eeeeece eee 349 What TO QO If secreciones 350 Lamps in instrument cluster 350 Lamp in center console 357 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display cccce 358 Where will find 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 380 PIP Sie GCM eonna 380 Vehicle tool Kit eeeeeeeeeeeeees 380 Spare WNEE csecccsseccesecceenes 383 Spare wheel bolts ceeeeeeeees 385 Unlocking locking in an emergency 386 Unlocking the vehicle 006 386 Locking the vehicle cc0008 387 Manually unlocking the transmission gear selector lever 388 Opening closing in an emergency 389 Power tilt sliding sunroof 389 Resetting activated head restraints 39 1 Resetting activated head restraints scatecnswaeconatictuneseenveencenniess 391 Replacing SmartKey batteries 392 SmartKey cccessccccsssscceessescneaees 393 Replacing DulbS cceeccceseeeeeeees 394 PUID i deseraa etc E 395 Replacing bulbs for front lamps 397 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps 400 Replacing wiper blades c 008 402 Removing and installing wiper DIG CCS POTET A 402 PATE Ct EE Seamus T 404 Preparing the vehicle 64
336. plays Digital speedometer 130 Maintenance service indicator 338 Messages in display 370 Multifunction display 125 Outside temperature 130 Symbol messages 365 Text messages 360 Vehicle status messages memory 135 358 Distance to empty range Trip computer 151 Door control panel 30 Doors Entry lamps 121 Locking unlocking SmartKey 94 Message in display 370 Opening from inside outside 96 99 Remote door unlock Tele Aid 272 Unlocking Mechanical key 386 DOT 332 Downhill driving Cruise control 246 Drinking and driving 283 Driving Abroad 290 Hydroplaning 287 In winter 288 Instructions 42 283 Problems 52 Safety systems 82 systems 245 Through standing water 289 Driving safety systems ABS 82 BAS 84 ESP 84 E Easy entry exit feature Electrical fuses see Fuses Electrical outlet 263 Electrical system Technical data 434 Electronic Stability Program see ESP Emergency calls 911calls 235 Tele Aid calls 266 267 271 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 168 39 148 Emergency operations Gear selector lever Unlocking 388 Locking unlocking the vehicle 386 Power tilt sliding sunroof Manual operation 389 Remote door unlock 272 Trunk lid Releasing from inside 102 Trunk lid Unlocking 387 Emergency Tensioning Device see ETD Emergency in case of Battery Jump starting 415 First aid kit 350 380 Flat tire Changing 404 Fuses 420 Hazard warning flasher 119 Instrument cluster Indicator lamps 350 3
337. position For easier parking you can adjust the passenger side exterior rear view mirror so that you can see the right rear wheel as soon as you engage reverse gear R For information on activating the parking position feature see Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position gt page 170 y 1 Memory button 2 Adjustment button 3 Passenger side exterior rear view mirror button Pas 70 220 gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 j h Controls in detail Memory function Press button 3 The passenger side exterior rear view mirror is selected Adjust the exterior rear view mirror with button 2 so that you see the rear wheel and the road curb Press memory button 1 Within 3 seconds press bottom of ad justment button 2 The parking position is stored if the mirror does not move If the mirror does move repeat the above steps After the setting is stored you can move the mirror again Controls in detail Lighting For information on how to switch on the Exterior lamp switch WJ off headlamps and use the turn signals see Daytime running lamp mode Switching on headlamps page 48 The exterior lamp switch is located on the gt page 116 EG Automatic headlamp mode Daytime running lamp mode gt page 116 and Turn signals gt page 49 dashboard to the left of the steering
338. ps Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps e Front fog lamps If after turning off the engine you do not open a door or do not close an opened door the lamps will automatically switch off after 60 seconds You can reactivate this function within 10 minutes by opening a door Move the selection marker with button or E to the Lighting submenu Press button eN or Ref repeatedly until the message Hdlamp delay off appears in the multifunction display The selection marker is on the current setting Hdlamp delay off PS4 32 3419 31 gt Press button or E to switch the delayed shut off feature Off or On gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position W before turning off the engine gt page 114 The headlamps delayed shut off feature is activated You can temporarily deactivate the delayed shut off feature gt Before exiting the vehicle turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 gt Then turn it to position 2 and back to position 0 The delayed shut off feature is deactivated It will reactivate as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in the starter switch Set interior lighting delayed shut off Use this function to set whether or not the interior lighting to remains lit during dark ness for approximately 10 seconds after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Lighting submenu gt
339. ps 25 Instrument cluster 350 356 Low beam headlamps 25 Maintenance service indicator 338 Rear fog lamp 114 Seat belt telltale 25 SRS 25 61 356 Turn signals 25 Language Setting 138 LATCH type child seat anchors see Children in the vehicle Leather upholstery Cleaning and care of 347 License plate lamps Messages in display 375 Replacing bulbs 396 Light alloy wheels Cleaning 346 Technical data 431 432 Light sensor see Lamp sensor Lighter see Cigarette lighter Lighting Parking lamps 114 Lighting Exterior and interior 114 Limp Home Mode 168 Loading see Vehicle loading Loading terminology 331 Loading the vehicle 308 Locator lighting 117 145 Locking knob 445 Loss of keys 98 Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet 425 Low beam headlamps Indicator lamp 25 Messages indisplay 375 376 Replacing bulbs 395 398 Switching on 48 Lubricants 436 Technical data 436 Lumbar support 109 M Main dimensions 435 Main fuse box In passenger compartment 421 Main odometer 125 Maintenance 12 338 Calling up service indicator display 339 Clearing service indicator message 339 FSS Canada vehicles 338 Maintenance System U S vehicles 338 Resetting service indicator 340 Service indicator message 338 Service term exceeded 339 Maintenance System U S vehicles 338 446 Manual headlamp mode see Headlamps Maximum load rating Tires 332 Maximum loaded vehicle weight 332 Maximum tire inflation pressure 333 MB
340. pute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler its affiliates or sales service organization and or as otherwise required or permitted by law Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system At a glance Cockpit Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Center console Overhead control panel Door control panel Q S amp 60 i oad lt 1 a Bas 10 3525 31 Oo Ooo Coo o Item Steering wheel gearshift control Cruise control lever Multifunction steering wheel Horn Instrument cluster Overhead control panel Page 163 245 26 126 24 122 29 00 AOOO Item Glove box lid release Glove box lock Center console Starter switch Hood lock release Steering wheel adjustment lever Remote trunk opening switch Parking brake pedal Door control panel Page 256 256 27 33 297 38 100 46 54 30 At a glance Item Parking brake release Combination switch e Turn signals e Windshield wipers e High beam Exterior lamp switch Exterior rear view mirror adjustment Headlamp washer button Cockpit Page 46 49 50 49 48 114 40 113 169 a Instrument cluster 10 30 em BIAS A a aN moh P54 32 3442 31 At a glance Instrument cluster Item Page Item Page Item Page Q Speedometer
341. r kilopascal kPa Recommended tire inflation pressure Recommended tire inflation pressure listed on placard located on driver s door B pillar for normal driving conditions Provides best handling tread life and riding comfort Operation Tires and wheels Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead TIN Tire Identification Number Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchases the means to easily identify such tires The TIN is comprised of Manufacturer s identifica tion mark Tire size Tire type code and Date of manufacture Operation Tires and wheels Tire load rating Numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support Tire ply composition and material used This indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufac turers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others Tire speed rating Part of tire designation indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved Traction Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires The amount of grip provided Tread
342. r and warning lamps except low beam headlamp indicator lamp high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated in the instrument cluster come on The indicator and warning lamps except low beam headlamp in dicator lamp high beam headlamp indi cator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated will go out when the engine is running This indicates that the respective systems are operational The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the starter switch the battery may not be sufficiently charged e Check the battery and charge it if necessary gt page 411 e Geta jump start gt page 415 To prevent accelerated vehicle battery discharge or a completely discharged battery always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch when the en gine is not in operation Vv Adjusting Warning AN All seat head restraint steering wheel and rear view mirror adjustments as well as fas tening of seat belts must be done before the vehicle is put into motion Seats The seats can be adjusted electrically For more information see Seats gt page 106 Warning AN Do not adjust the driver s seat while driving Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat back in an excessiv
343. r in the passenger compartment The air recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside tempera gt Press button Big gt page 175 tures ue Warning A N The indicator lamp on the button The indicator lamp on button is COMes Ol Air distribution and air vol Fogged windows impair visibility endanger not lit when the air recirculation mode ume are adjusted automatically ing you and others If the windows begin to is automatically switched on If the automatic mode of the climate con fog on the inside switching off the air A quantity of outside air is added after trol is switched off recirculation mode immediately should clear approximately 30 minutes interior window fogging If interior window fogging persists make sure the air conditioning gt page 182 is activated or Warning A N press button KJ or EA gt Turn air distribution control to or EZ gt page 175 Never operate the side windows and the tilt sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing pro cedure In the event that the closing procedure causes potential danger the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by pressing or pulling the respective window switch The closing of the tilt sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by moving the tilt sliding sunroof switch in the overhead control panel in any direction The closing of the side windows and tilt sliding sunroof can be reve
344. ration e Addition of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windshield and headlamp cleaning system Add MB Concentrate MB SummerFit to a premixed wind shield washer solvent antifreeze which is formulated for below freezing temperatures gt page 442 e Battery test Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature A well charged battery helps to make sure that the engine can be started even at low ambient temperatures e Tire change Winter tires Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45 F 7 C and whenever wintry road conditions prevail Not all M S rated tires provide special winter performance Make sure the tires you use show M S and the mountain snowflake marking on the tire sidewall These tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association RMA and the Rubber Association of Can ada RAC and have been designed specif ically for use in snow conditions Use of winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and ESP in winter operation For safe handling make sure that all mounted winter tires are of the same make and have the same tread design A Winter tires with a tread depth of less than Whe in 4 mm must be replaced They are no longer suitable for winter operation Warning Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires installed on your vehicle If the maximum speed for which your
345. rd Example A or placard Example B located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 309 Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only Load lim it data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illus trations below Refer to placard on ve hicle for actual data specific to your vehicle E i F TIRE AND LOAZ ING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 The combined weigh of occupants and cargo should never exceed JOCK kg or XXX Ibs as MANUAL FO oe rs ADDTIONAL FORMATION P40 00 2063 31 ey mm as a mas i 3G7DA03E418503870 Placard Example A 1 Seating capacity VEHICLE TIRE INFORMATION LE C APROITY WEIGHT i KG LBS Placard Example B 1 Seating capacity Steps for determining correct load limit The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regulations Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Step 1 Vehicles equipped with placard Example A gt Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard Step 1 Vehicles equipped with placard Example B gt Locate the heading Vehicle Capacity Weight on your vehicle s placard Step 2 gt Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be r
346. re menu Once within the submenu you can use the button EAN to move to the next function or the button RYA to move to the previous function within that submenu The settings themselves are made with button or E The functions of all the submenus will reset to factory settings The table below shows what settings can be changed within the various menus Instrument cluster Select speedometer display mode Select language Select display speed display or outside temperature for status indicator pages Time Date Time synchronization with head unit Set time hours Set time minutes Select automatic time change Daylight Saving Time DST summer Standard time winter Set date month Set date day Set date year Controls in detail Control system Detailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following Lighting Vehicle Convenience Set daytime running lamp Set automatic lock Activate easy entry exit mode USA only ing feature Set locator lighting Set parking position for exterior rear view mirror Set night security illumination Set interior lighting de layed shut off Controls in detail Control system Instrument cluster submenu Access the Instr Cl submenu via the Settings menu Use the Instr Cl submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings The following functions are available Function Page Select speedometer display
347. reased protection from head and neck in jury In the event of a rear end collision the active head restraints on the driver s and front passenger s seats are designed to move forward in the direction of travel providing the head with increased support earlier on in the collision sequence The ac tive head restraints move forward whether the seat is occupied or not A Do not attach any objects e g hangers to the head restraint posts Otherwise the ac tive head restraints may not be able to func tion properly or offer the intended degree of protection in the event of an accident Warning For information on resetting the activated active head restraints see Resetting acti vated head restraints gt page 391 Safety and Security Occupant safety You cannot remove the active head re straints on the driver s and passenger s seats For removal of the active head restraints we recommend that you contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A N Only use seat or head restraint covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes Benz for your vehicle model Using other seat or head restraint covers may interfere with or prevent the activation of the active head restraints Contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Center for avail ability Safety and Security Occupant safety A For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Warning Adjust head
348. required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards gt gt D Controls in detail Useful features When programming a garage door opener park the vehicle outside the garage Do not run the engine while programming the integrated remote control Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide CO and inhaling it can cause unconscious ness and possible death Programming the integrated remote control Step 1 gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 Step 2 gt If you have previously programmed a signal transmitter button and wish to retain its programming proceed to step 3 If you are programming the integrated remote control for the first time press and hold the two outer signal transmit ter buttons 2 and and release them only when the indicator lamp begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds This proce dure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory If you later wish to program a second and or third hand held transmitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons do not repeat this step and be gin directly with step 3 S
349. ress button F The control system dials the selected phone number Y Automatic transmission For more information on driving with an automatic transmission see Automatic transmission gt page 45 Your vehicle s transmission adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down These shift point adjust ments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions If the operating conditions change the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its shift program Warning A N Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob structing the pedals range of movement Keep the driver s footwell clear of all obsta cles If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance During the brief warm up transmission upshifting is delayed This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature Controls in detail Automatic transmission Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission The automatic transmission selects indi vidual gears automatically depending on the gear selector lever position D gt page 157 with gear ranges 4 3 2 1 gt page 160 the selected program mode M C S gt page 161 and gt page 165 the position of the accelerator pedal gt page 158 the vehicle speed Controls in detail Automat
350. restraints so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the poten tial for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intend ed to help reduce injuries during an accident Children in the vehicle If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child Make sure the infant or child is proper ly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion Infant and child restraint seats and infor mation on choosing an appropriate re straint system can be obtained from any Mercedes Benz Center Warning A N Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle even if they are secured in a child restraint system The children could e injure themselves on parts of the vehicle e be seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight The child restraint system s metal parts for example could become very hot and the child could be burned on these parts For information on head restraint adjust ment see Seats gt page 35 If children open a door they could e injure other persons e get out of the car and injure themselves or be injured by following tra
351. rols in detail Useful features a When a Tele Aid call has been initiated the audio system or COMAND System unit is muted and the selected mode radio tape or CD pauses The optional cellular phone if installed and inserted in cradle switches off If you must use this phone we recommend that you use it only with the vehicle at a stand still in a safe location Remove the phone from the cradle and place the call The navigation system if en gaged will continue to run The multi function display in the instrument cluster is available for use and spoken commands are only available by press ing the RPT button on audio system or COMAND System unit A pop up win dow will appear in the audio system or COMAND System unit display to indi cate that a Tele Aid call is in progress After the TeleAid call has ended the optional cellular phone switches on again A PIN entry might be necessary System self check Initially after switching on ignition mal functions are detected and indicated the indicator lamps in the SOS button the Roadside Assistance button and the Information button stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not come on The message Malfunction Drive to work Shop appears in the multifunction display A If the indicator lamps on the SOS button on the Roadside Assistance button and or on the Information button remain illuminated continuously in red and or the message Malfunction Drive to work
352. rovided it is connected to a hands free system and switched on TEL gt Switch on the telephone and Audio or READY COMAND gt Press button or on the steering wheel repeatedly until the message TEL appears in the multifunction display P54 32 2392 31 Which messages will appear in the multifunction display depends on whether your telephone is switched on or off This standby message indicates that your telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system Answering a call When your telephone is ready to receive calls you can answer a Call at any time In the multifunction display you will then see the message INCOMING CALL P54 392 2393 31 gt Press button F You have answered the call The duration of the call appears in the multifunction display If you do not wish to accept a call press button N Ending a call gt Press button N You have ended the call The standby message appears in the multifunction display Dialing a number from the phone book If your telephone is ready to receive calls you may select and dial a number from the phone book at any time gt Press button or repeatedly until the message TEL appears in the multifunction display gt Press button JAM or Reg The control system reads the phone book which is stored in the telephone This may take several minutes The message Please wait appears in the multifunction display Wh
353. rsed by again pressing and holding the button Press and hold button for approx 2 seconds The side windows and tilt sliding sunroof will close You can release button once the closing procedure has begun The windows and tilt sliding sunroof continue clos ing until they are fully closed Deactivating gt Press button fey gt page 175 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air recirculation mode is deactivat ed automatically e after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41 F 5 C e after 5 minutes if the air condition ing is turned off e after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41 F 5 C Controls in detail Climate control Press and hold button fs for approx 2 seconds The side windows and or tilt sliding sunroof will return to their previous position You can release button once the opening proce dure has begun The windows and tilt sliding sunroof continue opening until they have reached their previous position A window or tilt sliding sunroof will only return to its previous position if it has not been moved to another posi tion using the respective window switch or tilt sliding sunroof switch af ter it was closed with button Ey A window or tilt sliding sunroof that was moved will remain in its current posi tion if button is used to re open the remaining windows or tilt sliding sunroof Controls
354. runk floor handle in upper edge of trunk 1 Spare wheel with collapsible tire 2 Vehicle tool kit under collapsible tire 3 Retaining screw gt Loosen retaining screw 3 by turning it counterclockwise Remove collapsible tire 1 Remove vehicle tool kit 2 Practical hints Where will I find Vehicle jack The vehicle jack is located in the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor Warning A N The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle To help avoid personal injury use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack Keep hands and feet away from 1 Vehicle jack 2 Collapsible wheel chock and spare P40 10 2773 31 the area under the lifted vehicle Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack gt Turn crank handle in the direction of ar row as far as it will go wheel bolts 3 Towing eye bolt 4 Alignment bolt Storage position Wheel wrench Do not disengage parking brake while the Spare fuses and valve extractor vehicle is raised Be certain that the jack is Q Electric air pump always vertical plumb line when in use especially on hills Always try to use the jack on level surface Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take up bracket Always lower the vehicle onto suf
355. ry function provides an additional memory level The station memory for manually stored stations is not overwritten e Calling up Autostore memory level and storing stations P82 60 4483 31 gt Press AS soft key briefly The radio switches to the Autostore memory level AS and SEARCH appear in the display and the radio finds the ten stations with the strongest signals These stations are stored on the station buttons J to QM in order of signal strength Calling up stations gt Press desired station button EE to a Leaving the Autostore memory level gt Press FM or AM soft key briefly Interrupting radio mode The radio mode is interrupted by an incoming call on the telephone gt page 227 Mute on gt Press button The radio mode is interrupted and MUTED appears in the display Mute off gt Press button The radio mode Is again active Weather band P82 60 4458 31 gt Press WB soft key The weather band station last received is tuned in Selecting a weather band station directly gt Select desired weather band station with buttons ij to RA If a station cannot be tuned in a search is automatically started Search gt Press Z3 or button to tune in the next receivable weather band station If no weather band station is received after three consecutive scans of the complete frequency range then the scan stops at the channel with which it began and NO W
356. s turn signal lenses gt Use a mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car Sham poo with plenty of water Only use window cleaning solutions that are suitable for plastic lamp lens es Window cleaning solutions which are not suitable may damage the plas tic lamp lenses of the headlamps Therefore do not use abrasives sol vents or cleaners that contain solvents Never apply strong force and only use a soft non scratching cloth when clean ing the lenses Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens surface Cleaning the windows and the wiper blades The windshield wipers must be in a ver tical position before folding them away from the windshield They could other wise damage the hood Never open the hood when the wiper arms are folded forward Switch on the ignition gt page 33 Turn combination switch to wiper setting Il gt page 50 gt With wiper arms in vertical position switch off the ignition gt page 33 gt gt Warning AN For safety reasons switch off wipers and re move SmartKey from starter switch before cleaning the windshield and or the wiper blades Otherwise the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury Fold the wiper arms forward until they snap into place Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and detergent solution Use a soft clean cloth and a mild win
357. s etc Engine cleaning Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical compo nents and connectors from the intrusion of water and cleaning agents Corrosion protection such as MB Anticor rosion Wax should be applied to the en gine compartment after every engine cleaning Before applying all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated The poly V belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax Vehicle washing In the winter thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible When washing the vehicle underbody do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels Hand wash Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight gt Only use a mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car Shampoo gt Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif fused jet of water Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake gt Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently Rinse with clean water and thoroughly dry with a chamois Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish Operation Vehicle care Automatic car wash You can have your car washed in an auto matic car wash from the start Automatic car washes without brushes are prefera ble Do not clean your vehicle in an auto matic touchless car wash which uses caustic spray Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the paint or orn
358. s needed to operate your navigation system gt Press button or repeatedly until the message NAV appears in the multifunction display e If COMAND is switched off the mes sage NAV off appears in the multifunc tion display e With COMAND switched on but route guidance not activated the direction of travel and if available the name of the street currently traveled on appear in the multifunction display e With COMAND switched on and route guidance activated the direction of travel and maneuver instructions ap pear in the multifunction display Please refer to the COMAND manual for instructions on how to activate the route guidance system Vehicle status message memory menu Use the vehicle status message memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the system Such messages appear in the mul tifunction display and are based on condi tions or system status the vehicle s system has recorded The vehicle status message memory menu only appears if there are any messages stored AN Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are inten tionally not very detailed The malfunction and warning messages are simply a remind er with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner s and or driver s responsibility to maintain the vehicle s operating safety by having all required maintenance and Warning safety
359. s or other rolling code equipped devices may re quire you to press hold for 2 seconds and release the same signal transmit ter button a third time to complete the training process Step 12 gt Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed signal trans mitter button or Step 13 gt To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons repeat the steps above starting with step 3 Gate operator Canadian programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner Controls in detail Useful features If you live in Canada or if you are having gt Proceed with programming step 5and gt Press and hold the desired signal difficulties programming a gate operator step 6 to complete transmitter button or regardless of where you live by using the Do not release the button programming procedures replace step 4 a gt The indicator lamp Q will begin to with the following Upon completion of programming the flash after 20 seconds Without releas integrated remote control make sure Step 4 somere nihe andhe dronos con ing the signal transmitter button pro gt Press and h
360. s in the multifunction display Press and hold the reset button in the instrument cluster gt page 122 until the trip odometer is reset Controls in detail Instrument cluster Tachometer The red marking on the tachometer gt page 24 denotes excessive engine speed Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty To help protect the engine the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking Outside temperature indicator A The outside temperature indicator is not de signed to serve as an ice warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose Warning Indicated temperatures just above the freez ing point do not guarantee that the road sur face is free of ice The road may still be icy especially in wooded areas or on bridges The outside temperature is indicated in the multifunction display gt page 125 The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area Due to its location the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving There fore the accuracy of the displayed temper ature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor not by comparison to external displays e g bank signs etc When moving the vehicle into colder ambi ent temperatures e g when leaving your garage you
361. s malfunctioning The right brake lamp is malfunctioning The display for the lamps or the system is malfunctioning The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning The left front side marker lamp is malfunctioning The right front side marker lamp is malfunctioning Possible solution gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Display symbol 10 oe I Display message High beam left High beam right License plate lamp left License plate lamp ATINE Light sensor Drive to workshop Low beam left Possible cause consequence The left high beam lamp is malfunctioning The right high beam lamp is malfunctioning The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning The light sensor is malfunctioning The head
362. s not transmitted with the call CALL will appear in the display gt Press button The call is accepted Controls in detail Audio system Muting a call It is possible to mute a call the caller is then no longer able to hear you e Mute on gt Press MUT soft key gt MIC MUTE will appear in the display e Mute off gt Press MUT soft key again Terminating a call gt Press button The current call is terminated and the muted audio source becomes active again Talking with two callers at the same time If you wish to receive or place another call during an already active call you can accept or place the second call and switch between the callers or combine them into one call Note that the features described here are depending on availability from your mobile phone service provider e Placing accepting a second call gt Place new call by entering telephone number manually gt Press button You are connected to the second caller the first caller is kept on hold or gt Press button to accept a second call You will be notified of the second call acoustically but you will not see this in the display You are connected with the second caller the first caller is kept on hold Switching between calls gt Press and buttons This switches between the calls The non active call is kept on hold Terminating a call gt Press button The current call is t
363. s of the exterior with windshield washer fluid rear view mirror on the driver s side and 15 times the interior rear view mirror will respond l automatically to glare when When you switch off the ignition the counter resets e the ignition is switched on and For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system e incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view fa Y eee mirror ed Pat 25 375 gt page 304 1 H The rear view mirror will not react if gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 e reverse gear R is engaged gt Press button Q e the interior lighting is turned on The headlamps are cleaned with a high pressure water jet Controls in detail Good visibility Warning A N The auto dimming function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the interior rear view mirror The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver s side do not react for example if the rear window sunshade is in raised position Glare can endanger you and others Warning A N In case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape from the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks Electrolyte has an irritating effect Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or respiratory system In case it does immediately flush affected area wi
364. shop is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self check a malfunction in the system has been detected Warning If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above the system may not operate as expected Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Emergency calls An emergency call is initiated automatical ly following an accident in which the emer gency tensioning devices ETDs or air bags deploy An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the interior rear view mirror labeled SOS then briefly pressing the button located under the cover See gt page 267 for instructions on initiating an emergency call manually Once the emergency call is in progress the indicator lamp on the SOS button will begin to flash The message Connecting Call appears in the multifunc tion display When the connection is estab lished the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display All in formation relevant to the emergency such as the location of the vehicle determined by the GPS satellite location system vehi cle model identification number and color are generated A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon af ter the emergency call has been initiated The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the accident provided
365. shortened service life Therefore the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle Mercedes Benz 325 0 anticorrosion antifreeze agent Before the start of the winter season or once a year in hot southern regions you should have the anticorrosion antifreeze concentration checked The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for service Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Anticorrosion antifreeze quantity Model Approx freeze protection 35 F 37 C 49 F 45 C C 55 AMG 6 4 US qt 6 0 I 7 0 US qt 6 6 I Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system Both the windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system are supplied from the windshield washer fluid reservoir The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of approx e 3 2 US qt 3 0 I in vehicles without headlamp cleaning system e 6 4 US qt 6 0 I in vehicles with headlamp cleaning system gt Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit and water or concentrate and com mercially available premixed wind shield washer solvent antifreeze depending on ambient temperatures AN Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flamma ble Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze on hot engine parts because it may ignite and burn You could be seriously
366. sible to mute a call the caller is then no longer able to hear you e Mute on gt Press MUT soft key gt MIC MUTE will appear in the display e Mute off gt Press MUT soft key again Terminating a call gt Press button The current call is terminated and the muted audio source becomes active again Accepting a second incoming call If you receive another call during an already active call you can accept the second call and switch between the two e Accepting a second call gt Place new call by entering telephone number manually You will be notified of the second call acoustically but you will not see this in the display You are connected to the second caller the first caller is kept on hold e Switching between calls gt Press button This switches between the calls The non active call is kept on hold e Terminating a call gt Press button The current call is terminated The connection to the caller previously kept on hold is also interrupted however reconnection is indicated by an acoustic signal Placing a second call If you wish to place another call during an already active call you can place the second call and switch between the callers or combine them into one call Note that this feature is dependent on availability from your mobile phone service provider e Placing a second call gt Place a new call by entering telephone number manually
367. sible vehicle weight of the fully loaded vehicle weight of the vehicle including all options passen gers fuel and cargo and if applicable trailer tongue load It is indicated on Certification label located on the driver s door B pillar Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure There are 6 9 kPa to 1 psi another metric unit for air pressure Is bar There are 100 kilopascals kPa to 1 bar Maximum load rating The maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Maximum tire inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under normal driving conditions Normal occupant weight The number of occupants the vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kilograms 150 Ibs Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions Production options weight The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 Ibs 2 3 kilograms in excess of those standard items which they replace not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight including heavy duty brakes ride levelers roof rack heavy duty battery and special trim PSI Pounds per square inch A standard unit of measure for air pressure gt ba
368. sive speed especially in turns e Wet and slippery road surfaces e Following another vehicle too closely The ABS BAS and ESP cannot reduce this risk Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions ABS Warning A N Do not pump the brake pedal Use firm steady brake pedal pressure instead Pump ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness The Antilock Brake System ABS regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle The ABS is functional above a speed of ap proximately 5 mph 8 km h independent of road surface conditions On slippery road surfaces the ABS will respond even to light brake pressure The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster gt page 24 comes on when you switch on the ignition It goes out when the engine is running Braking At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode gt Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation Continuous steady brake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS namely braking power and ability to steer the vehicle The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to
369. sne 152 Automatic tranSMiSSIONn cccseeee 155 Gear selector lever position 157 DIVINE TDS aeie 158 Gear ranges xciectativstvsinens consents bene 160 Automatic shift program 161 Gear selector lever one touch Sears MINE anann 162 Steering wheel gearshift control one touch gearshifting 163 Manual shift program 066 165 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode c 00000 168 GOO VISIDINEY scectsceensstuete a nchatacteeiness 169 Headlamp cleaning system 169 Rear VIEW MIIOPS ccseecceeeeees 169 DUM VISONS ai ericecdasinoennieaeastemmenn 171 Rear window sunshade 172 Rear window defroster 6 173 Climate Control asinine 174 Deactivating the climate control SYSTE Mierer A ENa 177 Operating the climate control system in automatic mode 177 Setting the temperature 178 Adjusting air distribution and WOKING sisri a a 178 Adjusting air volume seeseseenesee 179 Adio SYSTEM asenaan 197 Front GeirOStel ccssActinetaceaices 179 Audio and telephone operation 197 Air recirculation mode 0066 180 Operating Safety ccccsesseceees 197 Air COMGITIONING sisnssvecevcsdeadevdveteteres 182 Operating and display elements 198 Rear passenger compartment Button and soft key operation 200 adjustable air vents cceccceeee 183 Operations mensan a 200 Automatic
370. ssible technical modifi cations and where proper installation will be performed Introduction Operator s Manual This Operator s Manual contains a great deal of useful information We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle we urge you to follow the in structions and warnings contained in this manual Ignoring them could result in dam age to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others Vehicle damage caused by fail ure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual Therefore you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper proce dures We continuously strive to improve our product and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment Therefore infor mation illustrations and descriptions in this Operator s Manual might differ from your vehicle Optional equipment is also described in this manual including operating instruc tions wherever necessary Since they are special order items the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of yo
371. st ride in back seats using regular seat belts Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder not face or neck A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 Ibs until they reach a height where a lap shoulder belt fits properly without a booster When the child restraint is not in use remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle even if the children are secured in a child restraint system Unsupervised chil dren in a child restraint system may use ve hicle equipment and may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Safety and Security Occupant safety BabySmart system air bag deactivation The EA REE indicator lamp is located on Bis PASS AT AIR BAG a T 7 PA ia 7 L w Y a wt wn aa Ak ee i 4 j t AATA 34 1 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp Special BabySmart compatible child seats designed for use with the Mercedes Benz system and available at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center are required for use with the BabySmart air bag deactivation system With the special child seat properly installed the passenger front air bag will not deploy Safety and Security Occupant safety The indicator lamp will be illuminated ex cept with the SmartKey
372. stem and telephone 264 7 Garage door opener 273 Left reading lamp on off 121 9 Tele Aid emergency call 264 system button P82 00 2354 31 At a glance Door control panel Inside door handle Memory function for storing seat exterior mirror and steering wheel settings Switches for seat adjustment Switches for opening closing front door windows Rear door window override switch Switches for opening closing rear door windows Remote trunk lid switch Getting started Unlocking Adjusting Driving Parking and locking Getting started Unlocking The Getting started section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey gt Press unlock button on the overview of the vehicle s most basic func SmartKey tions First time Mercedes Benz owners should pay special attention to the infor mation given here All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The anti theft alarm system is dis If you are already familiar with the basic armed functions described here the Controls in detail section gt page 94 will provide you with further information The correspond ing page references are located at the end gt Get in the vehicle and insert the SmartKey in the starter switch For more information see Locking and unlocking gt page 94 of each segment P80 35 2086 31 SmartKey with remote control Lock button
373. system self check after switching on the ignition together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button Bq See system self check gt page 266 if the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds If the indicator lamp in the Information button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call e g the relevant cellular phone network is not avail able The message Call failed ap pears in the multifunction display Information calls can be terminated using the button on the multi function steering wheel or the END But ton on the audio system or COMAND system If the indicator lamps do not start flash ing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated in red at any time the Tele Aid system has detected a malfunction or the service is not currently active and may not initiate a call Visit your authorized Mercedes Benz Center and have the system checked or contact the Re sponse Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Cana da as soon as possible Call priority If other service calls such as a Roadside Assistance call or Information call are active an Emergency call is still possible In this case the Emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls The indicator lamp in the respective butt
374. t alytic converters may not be available the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts e gasoline may have a considerably low er octane rating and improper fuel can Cause engine damage introduction Operator s Manual Certain Mercedes Benz models are avail able for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program For details consult an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or write to In the USA Mercedes Benz USA LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 In Canada Mercedes Benz Canada Inc European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto Ontario M4G 4C9 Introduction Where to find it This Operator s Manual is designed to pro vide comprehensive support information for you the vehicle operator Each section has its own reference color C At a glance Here you will find an overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver s seat E Getting started Here you will find all the information you need for your first drive You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes Benz vehicle or if you are rent ing or borrowing this vehicle Safety and Security Here you will find descriptions of the safety and security features of your vehicle Controls in detail Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed in your vehi cle This section expands on the Getting star
375. t page 175 again midify is switched on This function can The indicator the butt be switched off if necessary MOICatOr Amp On Sie BUON EOE out The automatic operation of air vol ume and air distribution switches off Activating gt Press button Ag gt page 175 while the engine is running Deactivating gt Set airvolume control Q gt page 175 to position O The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air volume and air distri bution are adjusted automatically Reactivating gt Set airvolume control G gt page 175 to any speed Controls in detail Climate control Setting the temperature Decreasing Adjusting air distribution and volume gt Turn temperature control 2 and or 3 gt page 175 slightly counterclock wise Use temperature controls 2 and 3 gt page 175 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger Use air distribution control gt page 175 to adjust the air distribution The following symbols are located on the compartment You should raise or lower The climate control system will corre controls the temperature setting in small incre spondingly adjust the interior air tem o o Symbol Function ments preferably starting at 72 F 22 C perature The climate control will adjust to the set Directs air through the center temperature as fast as possible o side and rear passenger If you turn the temperature control co
376. t control and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the respective upshift button on the steering wheel gearshift control The selected gear range appears in the multifunction display gt page 156 If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rom limit the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected Effect 4 The transmission shifts through fourth gear only The transmission shifts through third gear only With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine Effect The transmission shifts through second gear only Allows the use of engine s braking power when driving e on steep downgrades e in mountainous regions e under extreme operating conditions The transmission operates in first gear only For maximum use of engine s braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades Automatic shift program The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the center console 1 Program mode selector switch M Manual For manual gear shifting see Manual shift pro gram gt page 165 C Comfort For comfort driving S Sport For standard driving The current gear selector lever position and the selected program mode C S are indicated in the multifunction display gt page 156 Never change the program mode when the gear selector lever is out of position P This could result in a change of driving c
377. ta they cannot be ejected and will damage the drive Controls in detail Audio system Do not use CDs with an 8 cm diameter not even with a CD adapter Attempting to play CDs with an 8 cm diameter or playing such CDs with an adapter may cause damage to the CD drive Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Should excessively high or low tempera tures occur while in CD changer mode CD ERROR will appear in the display and the CD will be muted until the temperature has reached an acceptable level for the system to continue operation The single CD player play audio CDs the CD changer can play audio CDs as well as CDs with MP3 files Controls in detail Audio system Tips on handling CDs Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during playback Avoid scratches fingerprints and dust on the CDs Do not write on CDs or apply any labels or other material to them Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially available cleaning cloth Never wipe the CD in a circular motion instead wipe it in a straight line start ing in the center and moving outward Do not use solvents anti static sprays etc for cleaning Replace the CD in its case after use Protect CDs from heat and direct sunlight MP3 notes The CD changer can play audio CDs as well as CDs with MP3 files Information on MP3 data carriers CD media CD burning software and CD writers are availa
378. tance however is still considerably greater than when the road Is not covered with snow or ice Exercise ap propriate caution Avoid spinning of a drive wheel This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Operation Driving instructions Tire speed rating Regardless of the tire speed rating local speed limits should be obeyed Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions Warning A N Even when permitted by law never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi mum speed rating of the tires Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury and possible death for you and for others Your vehicle is factory equipped with Y rated tires which have a speed rating of 186 mph 300 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 155 mph 250 km h For information on tire speed rating for winter tires see Winter tires gt page 336 For additional general information on tire speed markings on tire sidewall gt page 324 Winter driving instructions The most important rule for slippery or icy roads Is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration braking and steering maneuvers Do not use the cruise control system und
379. tance trips will Service A in XXX Days lengthen the interval between services Service A due now Starting approximately 1 month before your next maintenance service is due one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or when you switch on the ignition example service A amp Service A in 300 Miles P54 32 2399 31 Clearing the maintenance service indicator message The maintenance service indicator is automatically cleared e after 10 seconds when you switch on the ignition or when reaching the main tenance service threshold while driving e after 30 seconds once the suggested maintenance service term has passed You can also clear it yourself 40 1 Reset button gt Press reset button Q on the instrument cluster The maintenance service indicator message is cleared and the standard display appears in the multifunction display gt page 130 Maintenance service term exceeded If you have exceeded the suggested maintenance service term you will see the following message in the multifunction display Service A exceeded by XXXX Miles Km Service A exceeded by XXX Days In addition a signal sounds when the message appears Any authorized Mercedes Benz Center will reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed maintenance service Operation Maintenance Calling up the maintenance service indicator display
380. te of manufacture The date of manufacture gt page 326 identifies the week and year of manufac ture The first two figures identify the week starting with 0 1 to represent the first full week of the calendar year The second two figures represent the year For example 3202 represents the 32nd week of 2002 Operation Tires and wheels Maximum tire load 1 Maximum tire load rating o For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration The maximum tire load is the maximum weight the tires are designed to support Operation Tires and wheels Maximum tire inflation pressure Always follow the recommended tire inflation pressure gt page 315 for proper tire inflation Warning A N Never exceed the max tire inflation pressure Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Warning A N Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires con A ee wear excessively and or unevenly adverse Q Maximum permissible tire inflation ly affect handling and fuel economy and are
381. te that the alarm system is activated Indicator lamp Q begins to flash after approximately 30 seconds after arming the alarm system Safety and Security Anti theft systems If the turn signal lamps do not flash three times one of the following elements may not be properly closed e adoor e the trunk Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again Safety and Security Anti theft systems Disarming the alarm system gt Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey The turn signal lamps flash once and an acoustic signal sounds once if equipped and feature activated to indicate that the alarm system is dis armed The alarm system will rearm automati cally after approximately 40 seconds if neither a door nor the trunk lid was opened Canceling the alarm To cancel the alarm gt Press the or button on the SmartKey or gt Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Tow away alarm Depending on vehicle production date your vehicle may not be equipped with the tow away alarm Once the tow away alarm is armed a visual and audible alarm will be triggered when someone attempts to raise the vehicle If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system gt page 264 provid ed Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated and that neces sary cellular service and GPS coverag
382. ted Driving If anything blocks the windshield wipers leaves snow etc switch them off immediately If the windshield wipers fail to function For safety reasons stop the vehicle in a safe location and remove SmartKey from starter switch before attempting to remove any blockage Remove blockage Turn the windshield wipers on again at all with combination switch in position l set the combination switch to the next higher wiper speed have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Problems while driving The engine runs erratically and misfires e An ignition cable may be damaged e The engine electronics may not be op erating properly e Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it Give very little gas Have the problem repaired by an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible The coolant temperature is above 248 F 120 C The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and turn off the en gine Allow engine and coolant to cool gt Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary gt page 301 In case of accident If the vehicle is leaking gasoline gt Do not start the engine under any cir cumstances gt Notify local fire and or police authori ties If the extent of the damage cannot be de termined gt N
383. ted section and also describes techni cal innovations If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you S E gt gt gt gt gt Ss Operation Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi cle SS ey Practical hints This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter E Technical data All important technical data for your vehi cle can be found in this section D Indexes The glossary provides explanations of the most important technical terms The table of contents and the index are de signed to help you find information quickly and easily The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation e this Operator s Manual e the Maintenance Booklet Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment options installed in your vehicle Y Symbols Trademarks ESP is a registered trademark of DaimlerChrysler HomeLink is a registered trademark of Prince a Johnson Controls Company BabySmart is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp SIRIUS and related marks are trade marks of Sirius Satellite Radio Inc The following symbols are found in this Operator s Manual Optional equipment is identified with an asterisk Since standard equipment varies between models the descrip
384. tems which affect emissions accurate identification of system malfunc Such malfunctions may result in excessive tions through the readout of diagnostic emissions values and may switch the en trouble codes It is located in the front left gine to its limp home emergency area of the footwell next to the parking operation mode brake pedal Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop immediately as soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on Check local require ments Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution USA only Your fuel tank is empty gt After refuelling start turn off and restart the engine three or four times in succes E Canada only Ga The yellow engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving The limp home mode is canceled You do not need to have your vehicle checked A loss of pressure has been detected in the gt Check the fuel cap gt page 293 fuel system The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky gt Close the fuel cap If it is not closed properly If it is closed properly gt Have the fuel system checked by an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution The yellow ESP warning lamp The ESP is deactivated gt Switch the ESP back on gt page 84 Come Hel inl es C
385. tenance System U S vehicles Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when the next vehicle mainte nance service is due The Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks distance driven and the time elapsed since your last maintenance service and calls for the next maintenance service accord ingly Maximum load rating gt page 332 Maximum loaded vehicle weight gt page 332 Maximum tire inflation pressure gt page 333 Memory function Used to store three individual seat steering wheel and mirror positions MON Motor Octane Number The Motor Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized method It is an indication of a gasoline s ability to resist undesired detonation knocking The average of both the MON Motor Octane Number and gt RON Research Octane Number is posted at the pump also known as ANTI KNOCK INDEX Multifunction display Display field in the instrument cluster used to present information provided by the control system Multifunction steering wheel Steering wheel with buttons for operating the control system Normal occupant weight gt page 333 Overspeed range Engine speeds within the red marking of the tachometer dial Avoid this engine speed range as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Poly V belt drive Drives engine components a
386. tep 3 gt Hold the end of the hand held remote control of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 in 5 to 12 cm away from the signal transmitter button 2 or to be programmed while keeping the indica tor lamp Q in view Step 4 gt Using both hands simultaneously press the hand held remote control button 6 and the desired signal trans mitter button or Do not release the buttons until step 5 is com pleted The indicator lamp Q will flash first slowly and then rapidly The indicator lamp Q flashes immedi ately the first time the signal transmit ter button is programmed If this button has already been programmed the in dicator lamp will only start flashing af ter 20 seconds Step 5 gt After the indicator lamp Q changes from a slow to a rapidly flashing light release the hand held remote control button and the signal transmitter but ton Step 6 gt Press and hold the just trained signal transmitter button or and observe the indicator lamp Q If the indicator lamp 1 stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the respective signal transmitter button or is pressed and re leased If the indicator lamp Q flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with th
387. ter driving off Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic Warm up the engine smoothly Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached When starting off on a slippery surface do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off Doing so may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear Operation Driving instructions Parking Set the parking brake whenever park ing or leaving the vehicle In addition move gear selector lever to position P When parking on hills always turn front wheels towards the road curb A Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Warning To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re sult of vehicle movement before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always e Keep right foot on brake pedal e Firmly depress parking brake pedal gt D gt D Operation Driving instructions e Move the gear selector lever to position P e Slowly release brake pedal e When parked on an incline turn front wheels towar
388. th The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects The enlarged cargo area should only be used for items which do not fit in the trunk alone Controls in detail Loading Cargo tie down rings The four cargo tie down rings are located in the trunk Cargo tie down rings gt Carefully secure cargo by applying even load on all rings with rope sufficient strength to hold down the cargo Always follow loading instructions gt page 254 Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartments Glove box Warning A N To help avoid personal injury during a colli sion or sudden maneuver exercise care when storing objects in the vehicle Put lug gage or cargo in the trunk if possible Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs Do not place anything on the shelf rai Unlocking below the rear window Q Glove box lid release Locking Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy 2 Glove box objects Locking glove box Keep compartment lids closed This will help Opening glove box gt Insert mechanical key gt page 386 to prevent stored objects from being thrown gt Pull glove box lid release 1 into the glove box lock and turn it to about and injuring vehicle occupants during The glove box lid opens downward position 2 an accident Closing glove box Unlocking glove box gt Turn mechanical key in the glove box gt Push glove box lid up to close
389. th water and seek medical help if necessary Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can be completely removed only while in the liquid state and by applying plenty of water Warning A N Exercise care when using the passen ger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Objects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position Follow these steps to activate the mirror parking position so that the passenger side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to the stored position The buttons are located above the exterior lamp switch 1 Driver s side exterior rear view mirror button 2 Passenger side exterior rear view mirror button gt Make sure you have stored a parking position for the passenger side exterior rear view mirror gt page 113 Make sure the Mirror set parking aid function in the Convenience submenu of the control system is switched to On gt page 149 Switch on the ignition gt page 33 Press button 2 for the passenger side exterior rear view mirror Place the gear selector lever in reverse gear R The passenger side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to the stored position The exterior rear view mirror returns to i
390. the gt Appleoanine brake charged battery with positive under You can now turn on the lights Ea hood terminal 2 in front of the filter gt Have the battery checked at the near gt shift gear selector lever to position P box with the jumper cables Clamp ca est authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Open the hood gt page 297 ble to charged battery Q first gt Flip up cover positive under hood E p terminal 2 in front of the filter box gt page 411 Never invert the terminal connections Y Towing the vehicle Mercedes Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift dolly equipment This method is preferable to other types of towing Do not tow start the vehicle Use flatbed or wheel lift dolly equip ment with the SmartKey in the starter switch turned to position O Do not tow with sling type equipment Towing with sling type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports To prevent damage during transport do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or Suspension parts Switch off the tow away alarm gt page 90 and deactivate the auto matic central locking gt page 147 When circumstances do not permit the recommended towing methods the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground or front wheels raised only so far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing m
391. the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents The air conditioning for the rear passenger compartment is controlled via the climate control panel gt page 174 The temperature at the center air vents for the rear passenger compartment Q and is the same as at the dashboard center air vents Controls in detail Climate control The air vents for the rear passenger Adjusting air distribution COMPAT ENT ane Nocatee Irele tear gt Push the slide for the left center peneEComeole vent Q or right center vent 3 to the left right up or down The air flow is directed in the corre sponding direction For draft free ventilation push slides 1 and upward pa3 00 2093 31 Adjusting air volume Left center air vent gt Turn thumbwheel up or down 2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for center air vents 3 Right center air vent The air volume is increased or decreased Controls in detail Automatic climate control Canada only rt P83 40 3027 31 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Canada only Item Left side defroster vent fixed Left side air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for left side air vent Thumbwheel for air volume control e a for left center air vent 16 15 13 12 411 10 Left center air vent adjustable Right center air
392. they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle The Tele Aid system is available if it has been activated and Is operation al Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services connection and cellular air time the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the response cen ter Location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the Response Center A If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call e g the rele vant cellular phone network is not available The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds Warning Should this occur assistance must be sum moned by other means Controls in detail Useful features Initiating an emergency call manually P82 9 2369 31 1 Cover 2 SOS button gt Briefly press on cover Q The cover will open Press SOS button 2 briefly The indicator lamp in SOS button will flash until the emergency call is concluded Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center Close cover Q after the emergency call is concluded Controls in detail Useful features Warning A N If you fee
393. tions and illustrations in this manual may differ slightly from the actual equipment of your vehi cle Warning A Warning notices draw your attention to haz ards that may endanger your health or life or the health or life of others Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle Helpful hints or further information you may find useful gt Page gt D gt Dis Introduction Symbols This symbol points to instructions for you to follow A number of these symbols appearing in succession indicates a multiple step procedure This symbol tells you where to look for further information ona topic This continuation symbol marks an interrupted procedure which will be continued on the next page In the glossary of technical terms this symbol is used to indicate cross references to term definitions play Words appearing in the multi function display and audio dis play are printed in the type shown here Introduction Operating safety Warning Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning Because the vehicle s electronic components are interconnected any modifications made may produce an undesired effect on other systems Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for repairs or modifications to ele
394. tory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown Calls to the toll free Roadside Assistance number 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA 1 800 387 0100 in Canada will be answered by Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day 365 days a year For additional information refer to the Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Program Brochure in your vehicle literature portfolio Change of address or ownership If you change your address be sure to send in the Change of Address Notice found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet or simply call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise If you sell your Mercedes please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it avail able to the next operator If you bought this vehicle used be sure to send in the Notice of Purchase of Used Car found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet or call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Cen ter in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in for eign countries please be aware that e service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available e unleaded gasoline for vehicles with ca
395. total interrupted and PAUSE appears in playing time of the CD appear in the the display display e Switching off pause function gt Press T soft key gt Press button The standard CD playback menu The CD changer mode is active appears otne cISpiay again GSM network phones Using your Mercedes Benz specified mobile telephone a number of functions and operating steps can be performed and displayed in the audio system display Further operating instructions not covered here can be found in the operating instruc tions for the multifunction steering wheel and the cellular telephone If your audio system is set up for telephone operation the symbol will appear in the display When you insert your Mercedes Benz specified mobile telephone into the telephone cradle you will be prompted to enter your PIN for 30 seconds gt page 223 This display disappears when you press any button When your mobile telephone is inserted into the telephone cradle you will see the reception strength in the upper right hand corner of the display Switching on the telephone Switching on the telephone gt Press button If the telephone was previously switched off PROCESSING appears in the display and you will then be prompted to enter your PIN Switching off the telephone p gt Press button for approximately 3 seconds PROCESSING appears in the display until the telephone is off Afterward PHONE OFF appears in the disp
396. ts previously stored driving position 10 seconds after you shifted out of re verse gear R immediately once your vehicle exceeds a speed of approximately 6 mph 10 km h immediately when you press button 1 for the driver s side mirror Controls in detail Good visibility Sun visors 1 Mounting 2 Mirror cover The sun visors protect you from sun glare Mirror lamp while driving 4 Sun visor gt Swing sun visor 4 down when you Warning A N experience glare Do not use the vanity mirror while driving P TOUSE NUTINAEA TONON M Up ae Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed SEU while vehicle is in motion Reflected glare i can endanger you and others If sun visor is disengaged from mounting Q with mirror cover 2 open mirror lamp will switch off If sunlight enters through a side window close mirror cover 2 if open disengage sun visor from mounting Q and pivot to the side Controls in detail Good visibility Rear window sunshade T Warning A N When operating the rear window sunshade make sure there is no danger of anyone be ing harmed by the raising or lowering proce dure Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment can caus
397. ture is below approximately 5 C 41 F e after 5 minutes if the air condition ing is turned off e after 30 minutes if the outside tem perature is above approximately 5 C 41 F aD Press and hold button for approx 2 seconds The side windows and or tilt sliding sunroof will return to their previous position You can release button once the opening proce dure has begun The windows and tilt sliding sunroof continue opening until they have reached their previous position A window or tilt sliding sunroof will only return to its previous position if it has not been moved to another posi tion using the respective window switch or tilt sliding sunroof switch af ter it was closed with button RJ A window or tilt sliding sunroof that was moved will remain in its current po sition if button Q2 is used to re open the remaining windows or tilt sliding sunroof Controls in detail Automatic climate control Canada only Charcoal filter An activated charcoal filter markedly reduces bad odors and removes pollutants from air entering the passenger compart ment The charcoal filter can be activated or deactivated The system switches automatically to the air recirculation mode if the e charcoal filter is switched on e carbon monoxide CO or nitrogen oxide NOx concentration of the out side air increases beyond a predeter mined level The automatic air recirculation mode does not function if the A C
398. ty Information on copyright The music tracks that you create for use in MP3 mode or that you play in MP3 mode are subject to copyright laws under appli cable international and national regula tions In many countries the reproduction of copyrighted materials is not permitted even if only for personal use without the express prior consent of the copyright holder Please check the current copyright laws for your country and comply with them These restrictions do not apply for exam ple to your own compositions and record ings or for recordings for which authorization has been obtained from the copyright holder Controls in detail Audio system MP3 playback You can play a CD with MP3 files on the CD changer as you would any standard audio CD All of the functions described for the CD changer also apply for the playback of CDs with MP3 files Keep in mind that the single CD player in the audio system unit is not able to read CDs with MP3 files The first 99 tracks on the CD including tracks in subdirectories are recognized and played Any additional tracks will not be played Due to the branched data structure playback of the first track may be de layed slightly Controls in detail Audio system Operating the single CD player in the audio system unit Loading a CD The single CD player in the audio system unit has capacity for one CD The CD slot for loading the drive is located
399. ual tires you should mount new tires on the front wheels first on vehicles with same sized wheels all around Operation Tires and wheels Tire care and maintenance Warning AN Regularly check the tires for damage Dam aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss As a result you could lose control of your vehicle Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have sustained damage replace them Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month For more informa tion on checking tire inflation pressure see Recommended tire inflation pressure gt page 315 Tire inspection Every time you check your tire inflation pressure you should also inspect your tires for the following e excessive treadwear gt page 307 e cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber e bumps bulges cuts cracks or splits in the tread or side of the tire Replace the tire if you find any of the above conditions Make sure you also inspect the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation Spare tires will age and become worn over time even if never used and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary Life of tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire inflation pressure e Distance driven Warning AN Tires and spare tire should be replace
400. uid Call up vehicle mal Indicator station ance instructions function warning and Canada only current direction system status messag 1 o traveled es stored in memory 5 Digital speed Select satellite ometer or out radio station a side temperature USA only Call up main Operate s tenance service CD player display O oO Check engine oil level The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored Controls in detail Menu Settings gt page 135 Reset to factory settings Instrument cluster sub menu Time Date submenu Lighting submenu Vehicle submenu Convenience submenu Control system Menu 6 Menu 7 Trip computer Telephone gt page 150 gt page 152 Fuelconsumption Load phone statistics after book start Fuelconsumption Search for statistics since name in the last reset phone book Distance to emp ty Controls in detail Control system Standard display menu The following functions are available Display digital speedometer or outside eee lt a temperature In the standard display the main odometer uncon ag and the trip odometer are shown in the Run Flat Indicator Canada 318 os pune Eso RA repeatedly i until you see the digital speedometer multifunction display only The current vehicle speed is shown in Call up digital soeedometer or 130 the multifunction display outside temperature
401. uipment includes a gt Press RJ button to call up settings Mercedes Benz specified mobile menu in the display telephone you can adjust its volume separately from the volume of the audio system while the telephone is being used P82 60 4452 31 vy Press RES soft key briefly the respective volume distribution is reset to its center flat level or gt Press and hold RES soft key until RESET appears in the display The volume distribution settings for fader and balance are set to their center level The radio switches back to the standard radio menu 4 seconds after the last soft key is pressed Connecting an external audio source AUX to the radio An optional dealer installed cinch connec tor for connecting an external audio source may become available for your vehicle model Feature description is based on preliminary information at time of printing Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for availability You can adjust the volume gt page 201 the sound settings gt page 201 and the volume distribution gt page 203 for the AUX input Calling up AUX mode gt Press and hold button until AUX appears in the display Canceling AUX mode p gt Press any audio source button Radio operation Selecting radio mode gt Press button Calling up wavebands You can choose from among the FM AM and WB wavebands Weather band gt page 208 aD FM waveband AM waveband 87 7
402. underneath the soft keys Keep in mind that the single CD player in the audio system unit is not able to read CDs with MP3 files Make sure the system is switched on Insert CD into CD slot The label side of the CD must face upwards The system automatically pulls the CD into the CD slot The audio CD begins to play If a CD is already loaded it must be ejected before inserting a new CD Inserting a second CD in the slot with another CD still loaded will cause dam age to the CD drive not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or cannot be read WRONG CD ERROR will ap pear in the display Ejecting a CD gt gt Make sure the system Is switched on Press EJECT button The system ejects the CD NO CD will appear in the display Remove CD from slot If you do not take the CD out of the CD slot within approx 15 seconds the system automatically pulls the CD back in and plays it If a CD is pulled back in press EJECT button for 5 seconds the CD will then be ejected Operational readiness of CD changer If a CD changer has been installed in the vehicle it can be operated from the front control panel of the audio system A loaded magazine must be installed to play CDs The CD changer is located in the glove box Loading unloading the CD magazine The CD changer may not be able to play audio CDs with copy protect
403. ur authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to advise you on this subject Use of snow chains may be prohibited depending on location Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains some tire sizes do not leave adequate clearance for snow chains To help avoid serious damage to your vehicle or tires use of snow chains is not permis sible with the following tire sizes e 225 40 ZR18 92Y XL e 245 35 ZR18 92Y XL e 145 70 17 92P collapsible tire Operation Maintenance We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet at the times called for by the maintenance service indicator display Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and maintenance service indicator at the designated times mileage will result in vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Maintenance service indicator The type of maintenance service due is message indicated in the multifunction display The maintenance service indicator will a notify you when your next maintenance Extended service B service is due PiS Vehicles equipped with FSS Flexible Service System only Canada vehicles The interval between maintenance services depends on your driving habits A gentle driving style moderate engine speeds and the Service A in XXXXX Miles Km avoidance of short dis
404. ur vehicle If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator s Manual your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures The Operator s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle Service and warranty information The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Mercedes Benz including New Vehicle Limited Warranty Emission System Warranty Emission Performance Warranty California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont only State Warranty Enforcement Laws Lemon Laws Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price if Mercedes Benz USA LLC and or its au thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or mal functions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts During the pe riod of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18000 miles approximately 29 000 km on the odometer of the vehicle whichever occurs first a reasonable number of repair attempts is
405. useful for example if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive If the vehicle was previously centrally locked using the SmartKey it will not unlock using the central unlocking You cannot lock or unlock the fuel filler flap switch with the central locking or unlocking switch Fi If the vehicle was previously locked T 4 with the central locking switch C i ETT e while in the selective remote con aei e A 1 Central locking switch trol mode only the door opened 2 Central unlocking switch from the inside is unlocked When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury e while in the global remote control mode the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door Is opened from the inside Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Locking gt Press central locking switch Q If all doors are closed the vehicle locks Unlocking gt Press central unlocking switch 2 The vehicle unlocks Controls in detail Seats For information on seat adjustment see Adjusting gt page 35 Front seat active head restraints Warning EN For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Adjust head restraint so t
406. uster illumination will brighten To dim illumination gt Turn reset button Q counterclock wise The instrument cluster illumination will dim Coolant temperature gauge The coolant temperature gauge is on the left side in the instrument cluster gt page 24 Warning A N e Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned e Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam com ing from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down Excessive coolant temperature triggers a warning in the multifunction display gt page 368 The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty During severe operating conditions e g stop and go traffic the coolant temperature may rise close to 248 F 120 C Controls in detail Instrument cluster Trip odometer gt Make sure you are viewing the trip odometer and main odometer in the multifunction display gt page 125 If itis not displayed press button or on the multifunction steering wheel gt page 126 until the trip odometer appear
407. utomatically by after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of op Deactivating deactivating the rear window defroster eration depending on the outside tempera As soon as the battery has sufficient ture gt Press button Raj or again voltage the rear window defroster The indicator lamp on the button goes automatically turns itself back on Warning uN out Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driving Visibility could otherwise be impaired endangering you and others gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 Controls in detail Climate control P83 30 4235 31 Item Left side defroster vent fixed Left side air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for left side air vent Thumbwheel for air volume control for left center air vent Left center air vent adjustable Right center air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for right center air vent l GLL Me we cic Thumbwheel for air volume control for right side air vent Right side air vent adjustable Right side defroster vent fixed 0006 Climate control panel For draft free ventilation move the sliders for the air vents and 9 to the middle position Climate control panel Canada only Ole BICC elele Controls in detail Climate control Item Air volume control Left side temperature control Right side temperature control Air distribution co
408. utwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Objects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your in terior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes The buttons are located above the exterior lamp switch is Passenger side exterior rear view mirror button Driver s side exterior rear view mirror button Switch on the ignition gt page 33 Press button 3 for the driver s side exterior rear view mirror or button 2 for passenger side exterior rear view mirror Push adjustment button up down left or right according to the desired setting If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly pushed forward hit from the rear or forcibly pushed rearward hit from the front reposition it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into place The mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual manner At low ambient temperatures the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically Getting started Adjusting o The memory function gt page 111 lets you store the settings for the exterior rear view mirrors together with the set tings for the steering wheel and the driver s seat position For more information see Rear view mir rors gt page 169 Getting started Driving Warning A N Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob structing the pedals range of movem
409. vailable at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center A placard with the recommended tire inflation pressures is located on the drivers door B pillar Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds page 316 or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition gt page 316 If such infor mation is provided it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap The tire inflation pres sure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires Follow tire manufacturer s mainte nance recommendation included with vehicle Technical data Rims and Tires The following pages also list the ap proved wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicles with winter tires Winter tires are not available as standard or optional factory equip ment but can be purchased from an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Depending on vehicle model and the standard or optional factory equipped wheel rim tire configuration on your vehicle Sport Package etc equipping your vehicle with winter tires approved for your vehicle model may also require the purchase of two or four wheel rims of the recommended size for use with these winter tires See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for more infor mation Technical data Rims and Tires Same size tires Model C 55 AMG Winter tires 205 50 R17 89H M S Rims light
410. ve of the collapsible tire Practical hints Where will I find Take the valve extractor from the vehicle tool kit gt page 381 Unscrew the valve insert from the valve and allow the air to escape It may take a few minutes for the col lapsible tire to deflate completely Screw the valve insert back into the valve Screw the valve cap back on the valve Pull the protective wrap provided with the vehicle tool kit over the spare wheel Store the spare wheel and the valve ex tractor in the storage compartment un derneath the trunk floor b gt Practical hints Where will I find gt gt Pierce the protective wrap with In case of a flat tire you may temporarily retaining screw Warning A use the spare wheel with collapsible tire k Secirethesoare wheel Bu turmine re when observing the following restrictions a aoe y 8 The dimensions of the spare wheel with taining screw clockwise collapsible tire are different from those of e Do not exceed a vehicle speed of T the road wheels As a result the vehicle han 90 mph 80 km h dling characteristics change when driving e Drive to the nearest tire repair facility To prevent damage always disengage with a spare wheel mounted to have the flat tire repaired or trunk floor handle from upper edge of l trunk and lower trunk floor before The spare wheel with collapsible tire should replaced as appropriate closing the trunk only be used temp
411. vent adjustable Automatic climate control panel Thumbwheel for air volume control for right center air vent Thumbwheel for air volume control for right side air vent OPO Co Re we ice Right side air vent adjustable Right side defroster vent fixed ROTO Automatic climate control panel For draft free ventilation move the sliders for the air vents and 9 to the middle position SOE S Sl E eee 0000 Item Left side air distribution control Front defroster Temperature control left raising Display Air volume control raising Temperature control right raising Rear window defroster Right side air distribution control Charcoal filter AC cooling on off Residual heat ventilation Temperature control right lowering Air volume control lowering Temperature control left lowering Air recirculation Automatic climate control on off complete system Air distribution and air volume automatic mode Controls in detail Automatic climate control Canada only The automatic climate control is operation al whenever the engine is running You can operate the automatic climate control sys tem in either the automatic or manual mode The system cools or heats the inte rior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside tem perature Warning A N When operating the automatic climate control the air that enters the passenger compartment through the a
412. wards automatically Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance 5 If the trunk does not open it is still locked separately gt page 103 Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key you should do the following gt Have the SmartKey deactivated by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Report the loss of the SmartKey or the mechanical key immediately to your car insurance company gt If necessary have the mechanical lock replaced Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to supply you with a replace ment Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Opening the doors from the inside To cancel the alarm do one of the Opening the trunk following You can open a locked door from the inside Open door only when conditions e Press button or onthe Opening the trunk from the outside are safe to do so SmartKey A minimum height clearance of 5 71 ft e Insert the SmartKey in the starter 1 74 m is required to open the trunk lid 2 C switch The handle is located above the rear license plate recess Front doors gt Pull on door handle 2 on the respective front door to open door If door was locked locking knob will move up 1 Locking kno Rear doors 2 Inside door handle gt Pull up locking knob 4 on the respective rear door to unlock door SP Pg0 20 2613 31 If the vehicle has previously been gt Pull
413. wheel If you drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country where the vehicle is regis tered you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams Relevant information can be obtained at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center seas Parking lamps also tail lamps license plate lamps side marker lamps instrument panel lamps Low beam headlamps or high beam headlamps when the combination switch is pushed forward and parking lamps j Za z Exterior lamp switch l l Standing lamps right turn left one stop ed Standing lamps left turn left two stops Indicator lamp for front fog lamps Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp With the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the driver s door open a warning sounds if the parking lamps or low beam headlamps are switched on The message Switch off lights appears in the multifunction display Manual headlamp mode The low beam headlamps and the parking lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch Automatic headlamp mode The following lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light e Low beam headlamps e Tail and parking lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps Warning VAN If the exterior lamp switch is set to RI e the headlamps may switch off unexpect edly when the system senses bright ambient light for example
414. when the air recirculation button ey in the control panel of the climate control gt page 175 or auto matic climate control Canada only gt page 191 or the charcoal filter button Eg in the control panel of the automatic climate control Canada only gt page 193 is pressed and held Switch on the ignition gt page 33 Controls in detail Power tilt sliding sunroof Opening and closing the power tilt sliding sunroof gt To open close raise or lower the tilt sliding sunroof move the sunroof switch to resistance point in the required direction of arrows Q to 4 Release the sunroof switch when the tilt sliding sunroof has reached the desired position Fully opening Express open and closing Express close the power tilt sliding sunroof gt To open or close the tilt sliding sunroof move the sunroof switch past the resistance point in the required direction of arrow C to and release The tilt sliding sunroof opens or closes completely Controls in detail Power tilt sliding sunroof Stopping the power tilt sliding sunroof Synchronizing the power tilt sliding gt Switch on the ignition gt page 33 dur express Operation sunrooh gt Move and hold the sunroof switch in di gt Move the sunroof switch in any The tilt sliding sunroof must be rection of arrow Q gt page 242 until direction the tilt sliding sunroof is fully raised at synchronized the rear A E E gt Ho
415. will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed A delay also occurs when ambient temper atures rise This prevents inaccurate tem perature indications caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driving Y Control system The control system is activated as soon as the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 1 The control system enables you to e call up information about your vehicle e change vehicle settings For example you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next due for service to set the language for messages in the instrument cluster display and much more The displays for the audio systems radio CD player will appear in English regardless of the language selected Warning A N A driver s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second The control system relays information to the multifunction display Controls in detail Control system Multifunction display A e tie O j ie PM STO PRNO E zF 1 Trip o
416. with sufficient cross section and insulated terminal clamps e Always make sure the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys fans or oth er parts that move when an engine Is started or running Practical hints Jump starting gt Start engine of the vehicle with the Warning A N charged battery and run at idle speed Keep flames or sparks away from battery Do not smoke gt Connect negative terminal of the charged battery with negative under hood terminal in front of the filter box with the jumper cables Clamp ca ble to charged battery first Observe all safety instructions and precau tions when handling automotive batteries gt page 303 _ gt Start the engine of the disabled l P54 10 2386 31 vehicle The battery is located in the engine compartment on the right hand side The terminals for jump starting are located in front of the battery 1 Positive terminal of charged battery 2 Positive under hood terminal in front of discharged battery 3 Negative under hood terminal in front gt Make sure the two vehicles do not of discharged battery gt Remove the jumper cables first from touch 4 Negative terminal of charged battery negative terminals 8 and and then from positive terminals 2 and You can now again turn on the electrical consumers Do not turn on the lights under any circumstances gt Turn off all electrical consumers gt Connect positive terminal Q of
417. wiveling cup holder inward and aS Sliding it in gt Push button Q gt Turn the cup holder in direction of arrow 2 until it engages The cup holder slides upward arrow 3 until it engages You can now use both cup holders H gt Press the cup holder in direction of No objects should be in the swiveling arrow 4 until it engages cup holder when the swiveling cup holder is slid upward Otherwise the T swiveling cup holder or the objects No objects should be in the stationary could be damaged cup holder when the swiveling cup holder is turned inward and pushed in Otherwise the swiveling cup holder or the objects could be damaged Controls in detail Useful features Cup holder in rear seat armrest Closing cup holder gt Slide cup holder back until it engages Do not sit on or lean your body weight against the armrest when it is folded down as you could otherwise damage it 14 Cup holder Opening cup holder gt Briefly press the front of cup holder 1 The cup holder slides out slightly gt Pull out the cup holder until it stops Ashtrays Center console ashtray 1 Cover plate 2 Sliding button 3 Ashtray insert gt Briefly press the bottom of cover plate The cover plate opens automatically Controls in detail Useful features Removing ashtray insert Reinstalling ashtray insert Removing ashtray insert gt Push the ashtray insert
418. works to stabilize the vehicle The ESP is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces The ESP also stabilizes the vehicle during braking maneuvers The ESP warning lamp in the speedometer flashes when the ESP is engaged The ESP warning lamp in the speedometer comes on when you switch on the ignition It goes out when the engine is running Warning AN Never switch off the ESP when you see the ESP warning lamp flashing in the speedometer In this case proceed as follows e While driving off apply as little throttle as possible e While driving ease up on the accelera tor e Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid The ESP cannot prevent accidents result ing from excessive speed Warning AN The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dan gerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP will only function properly if you use wheels of the recommended tire size gt page 429
419. ws can be immediately halted by position i pressing or pulling the respective window _ smaa Tre dosing ai tne tlb s listing A window or tilt sliding sunroof will Condensation may drip out from under unearen be tmmeehetaly talked sy only return to its previous position if it neath the vehicle This is normal and has not been moved to another posi not an indication of a malfunction moving the tilt sliding sunroof switch in the overhead control panel in any direction tion using the respective window D switch or tilt sliding sunroof switch af Me Coane of the side windows and ter it was closed with button ES A a tilt sliding sunroof can be reversed by again window or tilt sliding sunroof that was pressing and holding the button EEJ moved will remain in its current posi If you turn off the cooling function the tion if button EBM is used to re open vehicle will not be cooled when weather Deactivating the remaining windows or tilt sliding conditions are warm The windows can fog b Prose ution re gt page 185 sunroof ay TSO UY Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and The indicator lamp on the button goes others out Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air condi tioning cooling function of the automatic climate control system The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified gt Press button gt page 185 The indicator lamp on the button goes out Th
420. y on the brake pedal the vehicle could accel erate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Switching on headlamps Low beam headlamps The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel Exterior lamp switch Off 2 Low beam headlamps on gt Turn exterior lamp switch to position Jey The low beam headlamp indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on gt page 24 High beam The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch C High beam 2 High beam flasher gt Push combination switch in direction of arrow 1 The high beam headlamp indicator lamp EDJ in the instrument cluster comes on gt page 24 For more information on headlamps see Lighting gt page 114 Getting started Driving Turn signals gt Press combination switch in direction of arrow or 2 The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp EJ or EJ in the instrument cluster flashes gt page 24 The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column The combination switch resets auto matically after major directional changes If the combination switch is pressed to point of resistance the turn signals will flash three tim
421. y est authorized Mercedes Benz Center tensioning devices ETDs could deploy unexpectedly or fail to deploy in an acci dent Warning A N In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above the SRS may not be operational For your safety we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not be deployed when needed in an accident which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in an accident and or injury to you or to others Lamp in center console Problem e PASS Be Sk The front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp comes on and remains illu minated The front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp does not come on or does not remain illuminated with a BabySmart child seat properly installed on the front passenger seat Practical hints What to do if Possible cause consequence Suggested solution A BabySmart child seat is installed on the front passenger seat Therefore the passenger front air bag is switched off The system is malfunctioning when gt Have the system checked as soon as there is no BabySmart child seat possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz installed on the front passenger seat Center The system is malfunctioning gt Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat and
422. yellow indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch comes on gt page 114 Push in the exterior lamp switch to first stop The rear fog lamp switches off The yellow indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch goes out The front fog lamps remain lit Combination switch The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher High beam gt gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position or Big gt page 114 Push the combination switch in direction of arrow 1 to switch on the high beam The high beam headlamp indicator lamp E in the instrument cluster comes on gt page 24 Pull the combination switch in direction of arrow 2 to its original position to switch off the high beam The high beam headlamp indicator lamp E in the instrument cluster goes out High beam flasher gt Pull the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 2 Controls in detail Lighting Hazard warning flasher Switching on hazard warning flasher Switching off hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher can be gt dea warning flasher gt Press hazard warning flasher switch Q switched on at all times even with the switch aon SmartKey removed from the starter All turn signals are flashing PLGA gd If the hazard warning flasher has been The hazard warning flasher switches on automatically when an air bag deploys
423. yrorwa zoorpa opsi ERLO 1125 70015 MOON P40 00 2064 31 1 Tire and Loading Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures Placard Example A lists the recommend ed cold tire inflation pressures for maxi mum loaded vehicle weight The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment Operation Tires and wheels Placard Example B VEHICLE TIRE INFORMATION Wa itaecremmeccy Leen ES a SEATI IG CAPACITY 1 Vehicle Tire Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures Placard Example B lists the recommend ed cold tire inflation pressures for maxi mum loaded vehicle weight The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment Placard Example B may list recommended cold tire inflation pressures for different vehicle loads Important notes on tire inflation pressure A If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly drops Warning e Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects e Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure are also increased while driving depending on the driving speed and the tire load If you will be driving your vehicle at high speeds of 100 mph 160 km h or higher where it is legal and conditions allow consult the placard on the inside of the fuel filler flap
424. z Center for headlamp adjustment a If the headlamps or front fog lamps are fogged up on the inside as a result of high humidity driving the vehicle a distance with the lights on should clear up the fogging Substitute bulbs will be brought into use when lamps malfunction Observe the messages in the multifunction display gt page 374 P54 00 2418 31 Front lamps Lamp Type Q Additional turn signal LED lamp 2 Halogen headlamp Turn signal lamp 1156 A Bi Xenon headlamp Turn signal lamp 2357 A 3 Halogen headlamp Low beam H7 55 W Bi Xenon headlamp Low and high beam D2S 35 W Vehicles with Bi Xenon headlamps Low beam and high beam use the same D2S 35W lamp Do not replace the Xenon bulbs yourself Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints Replacing bulbs Lamp Type Halogen headlamp High beam high beam flasher H7 55 W Bi Xenon headlamp High beam flasher H7 55 W Parking and standing W5W lamp Front fog lamp HB4 51 W Side marker lamp W5W Practical hints Replacing bulbs Rear lamps Lamp Type High mounted brake LED lamp Brake lamp P21W 9 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W Parking and side P 21 5 W marker lamp QD Backup lamp P21W 2 License plate lamps C5W Rear fog lamp drivers P 21 4 W side only tail and standing lamp Warning VAN Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot Allow the lamp to cool down before ch
425. zed Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints What to do if Display message Run Flat Indicator inactive Check tires Then reactivate Run Flav Indicator Run Flat Indicator unavailable Tire pressure Check tires A Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle Warning Possible cause consequence The Run Flat Indicator is malfunc gt tioning There was a warning message about gt a loss in tire inflation pressure and the Run Flat Indicator has not been reactivated yet The Run Flat Indicator has been gt switched off due to an error The Run Flat Indicator indicates p that the pressure is too low in one or more tires Possible solution Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Make sure that the correct tire inflation pressure is set for each tire Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers Observe the traffic situation around you Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure as required gt page 317 If necessary change the wheel gt page 404 Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator after adjusting the tire inflation pressure values gt page 319 You may lose control of the vehicle Contin ued driving with a flat tire will caus

Braun 6510 Electric Shaver User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents